BMW 4 Series Manual

Contents Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine®
THE BMW 4 SERIES

CONVERTIBLE.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17

4 Series Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable trip.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 II/17, 03 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 210 Refueling
page 262. 212 Fuel
214 Wheels and tires
231 Engine compartment
6 Information
233 Engine oil
At a glance 237 Coolant
14 Cockpit 239 Maintenance
18 iDrive 241 Replacing components
26 Voice activation system 246 Breakdown assistance
29 General settings 252 Care
41 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Reference
Controls 258 Technical data
46 Opening and closing 261 Appendix
65 Settings 262 Everything from A to Z
75 Transporting children safely
79 Driving
93 Displays
111 Lights
117 Safety
142 Driving stability control systems
148 Driving comfort
171 Climate control
180 Interior equipment
190 Storage compartments
Driving tips
196 Things to remember when driving
199 Loading
201 Saving fuel

Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Dealer’s service center
ular topic is by using the index. A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in questions at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Updates made after the editorial The Owner's Manual and general information
deadline on BMW, for example on technology, are avail‐
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐ able on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐ BMW Driver’s Guide App
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
cle.
Internet:
Owner's Manual for Navigation, www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as Symbols and displays
printed book from the service center.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐ Indicates precautions that must be followed
lowing Owner's Manuals: precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
vehicle.
Display in the vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
6
Information
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the the features and options applicable to your ve‐
voice activation system. hicle.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as Status of the Owner's
numbered list. The steps must be carried out Manual
in the defined order.
1. First action step.

Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
2. Second action step.
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
Enumerations
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
bullet points. those in your vehicle.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility. Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Symbols on vehicle components Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
Indicates that you should consult the ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
information on a particular part or assembly. uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Vehicle features and options ▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
This Owner's Manual describes all models and Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
all standard, country-specific and optional dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
equipment that is offered in the model series. cle.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐ For Your Own Safety
cause of the selected optional features or the
country-specific version. Intended use
This also applies to safety-related functions Observe the following when using the vehicle:
and systems.
▷ Owner's Manual.
When using these functions and systems, the
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
stickers.
served.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐ ▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
mentary Owner's Manuals. the vehicle is driven.
Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to ▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
answer any questions that you may have about ments.
7
Information
Warranty BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐

Your vehicle is technically configured for the ual product from another manufacturer can be
operating conditions and registration require‐ used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
ments applying in the country of first delivery, safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
to be operated in a different country it might be whether these products are suitable for BMW
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially vehicles under all usage conditions.
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply California Proposition 65 Warning
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐ California laws require us to state the following
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐ warning:
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐ Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
formation on warranty is available from a bile components and parts, including compo‐
dealer’s service center. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
Maintenance and repairs State of California to cause cancer and birth
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
materials and high-performance electronics, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
requires suitable maintenance and repair work. products of component wear contain or emit
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends chemicals known to the State of California to
that you entrust corresponding procedures to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, for pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
instance maintenance and repair, according to engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
BMW specifications with properly trained per‐ cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
sonnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
"another qualified service center or repair water.
shop".
Service and warranty
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐ We recommend that you read this publication
sequent damage and related safety risks. thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
Parts and accessories ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐ ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
cessory products approved by BMW. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
Approved parts and accessories, and advice ranty.
on their use and installation are available from ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
a BMW dealer's service center.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
BMW parts and accessories have been tested ited Warranty.
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
Detailed information about these warranties is
vehicles.
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐ Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
sories. Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
8
Information
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
designed to meet the particular operating con‐ its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your tion speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
country and continental region in order to de‐ transverse acceleration.
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
is operated under those conditions. If you wish tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
to operate your vehicle in another country or
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
gagement of the stability control systems.
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
warranty limitations or exclusions for such This data is purely technical in nature and is
country or region. In such case, please contact used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
Customer Relations for further information. mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
Maintenance data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the pair services, service processes, warranty
road safety, operational reliability and the New claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
Vehicle Limited Warranty. mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of a dealer’s
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ures:
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
▷ BMW Maintenance system using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet further information there if you need it. After an
for US models error is corrected, the information in the fault
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
Canadian models ous basis.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to With the vehicle in use there are situations
these specifications, this could result in seri‐ where you can associate this technical data
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is with individuals if combined with other infor‐
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
Warranty. vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
Data memory agreed with the customer — such as vehicle
emergency locating — allow certain vehicle
Many electronic components on your vehicle data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
Event Data Recorder EDR
records the state of a component, a module, a This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
system or the environment: corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
▷ Operating states of system components, record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
e.g., fill levels. tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
9
Information
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. Vehicle identification

The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
number
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing The vehicle identification number can be found
the accelerator and/or brake pedal. in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. side of the vehicle..
This data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. Reporting safety defects
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐ For US customers
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐ The following only applies to vehicles owned
tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, and operated in the US.
age, and crash location, are recorded.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the jury or death, you should immediately inform
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
quired during a crash investigation. tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
To read data recorded by an EDR, special North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ 1-800-831-1117.
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
enforcement, that have the special equipment, open an investigation, and if it finds that a
can read the information if they have access to safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
the vehicle or the EDR. may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
10
Information
formation about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
11
At a glance
This chapter shows the arrangement of the
buttons, switches and displays. Moreover, you
will become familiar with the available control
concepts and options quickly.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and
specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable laws and regulations
series. It also describes features that are not must be observed.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows, all 59 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

2 Power windows, individual 59 tion 138
3 Exterior mirror operation 72 Intelligent Safety 128

4 Glove compartment on the driver's
side 191
Lane departure warning 137
Driver assistance systems
5 Lights
14
Cockpit At a glance
Front fog lights 114 Cruise control: resume speed
Light switch 111 Active Cruise Control: reduce

distance
Lights off Active Cruise Control: increase

Daytime running lights 113 distance
Parking lights 111 Cruise control rocker switch
8 Instrument cluster 93
Low beams 111 9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
Automatic headlight con‐ er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
trol 112 tainment and Communication 6
Adaptive Light Control 113 Volume, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and
High-beam Assistant 114
Communication 6
Instrument lighting 115
Voice activation 26
6 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see Owner's Manual

Turn signal 83 for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 104
High beams, head‐
light flasher 83 10 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 84
High-beam Assistant 114
Rain sensor 85
Canada: roadside parking
light 111
Clean the windshield and head‐
Onboard Computer 105
lights 86
11 Start/stop the engine and switch

7 Steering wheel buttons, left
the ignition on/off 80
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 154 Auto Start/Stop function 81
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

terrupt 148 12 Horn, entire surface
Cruise control: store speed
15
At a glance Cockpit
13 Heated steering wheel 74 14 Adjust steering wheel 74

15 Unlock hood 232
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 18 10 Parking brake 83

2 Ventilation 177 11 PDC Park Distance Control 157
3 Hazard warning system 246 Rearview camera 160
Parking assistant 167
Central locking system 51 Surround View 160
Side View 163

4 Glove compartment 190
5 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ 12 Driving Dynamics Control 144
nication 6
6 Climate control 171 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
7 Controller with buttons 18 trol 142
8 Air collar 67
13 Steptronic transmission selector
9 Hardtop 60 lever 88
16
Cockpit At a glance
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 246 3 Interior lights 115
2 Reading lights 115 4 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐

ger airbag 119
17
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Operation
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Overview
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
to the selected options or country versions.
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
The concept 1 Control Display

The iDrive combines the functions of many 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
switches. These functions can be operated via the equipment version, with touchpad
the Controller.
Control Display
Safety information General information

WARNING To clean the Control Display, follow the care
Operating the integrated information instructions, refer to page 255.
systems and communication devices while Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to play; otherwise, the Control Display can be
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an damaged.
accident. Only use the systems or devices In the case of very high temperatures on the
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary, Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
stop and use the systems and devices while lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
the vehicle is stationary.◀ down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning, the normal functions
are restored.
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
18
iDrive At a glance
2. "Turn off control display"
Buttons on the Controller

Controller with navigation system
Button Function
General information Press once: call up main menu.
The buttons can be used to open the menus Press twice: display all menu items
directly. The Controller can be used to select of the main menu.
menu items and enter the settings.
Open the Communication menu.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller, refer to
page 22. Open the Media/Radio menu.
Operation Open destination input menu for

▷ Turn. navigation.
Open navigation map.
Press and hold: open the menus

used last.
Open the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

▷ Press.
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Move in four directions.
19
At a glance iDrive
Button Function
Press and hold: open the menus

used last.
Open the Options menu.
▷ Press.
Operating with the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
▷ Move in two directions.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.

Buttons on the Controller All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
Button Function 2. Select a menu item.
Press once: call up main menu. 3. To move the menu item to the desired po‐
sition, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Press twice: display all menu items
of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
20
iDrive At a glance
Selecting menu items Opening recently used menus

Highlighted menu items can be selected. The recently used menus can be displayed.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu Press and hold this button.
item is highlighted.
Opening the Options menu

Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for exam‐
ple "iDrive settings". The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split
Changing between displays
screen".
After a menu item is selected, for instance
▷ Control options for the selected main
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
Closes the current display and shows the the selected menu, for instance "Save
previous display. station".
▷ Press button. Changing settings

The previous display opens. 1. Select a field.
▷ Move the Controller to the right. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
New display is opened. ting is displayed.
The arrow indicates that additional displays 3. Press the Controller.

can be opened.
21
At a glance iDrive
Activating/deactivating the functions Entry comparison

Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ When entering names and addresses, the
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐ choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the tered and letters may be added automatically.
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐ Entries are continuously compared with data
tion. stored in the vehicle.
Function is activated. ▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
Function is deactivated. for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
Entering letters and numbers entered in all languages that are available
in iDrive.
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered via the Using alphabetical lists
controller. For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐
The keyboard's display changes automatically. tries, the letters for which there is an entry are
displayed at the left edge.
Entering
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ quickly.
bers.
All letters for which there are entries are
2. : confirm entry. displayed on the left side.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
Symbol Function
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
Press the controller: delete the let‐ played.
ters or number.
Hold the controller down: delete all

letters or numbers. Touchpad
General information
Switching between upper/lower case,
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
numbers and characters
the touchpad on the Controller.
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters Selecting functions
and numbers.
1. "My Vehicle"
Symbol Function 2. "iDrive settings"
Enter the letters. 3. "Touchpad"
Enter the numbers. 4. Select the desired setting.

▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
or Change between capital and
lower-case letters. ▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without
selecting the list field.
22
iDrive At a glance
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered Split screen

letters and numbers.
General information
Entering letters and numbers
Additional information can be displayed in sev‐
Entering letters requires some practice at the eral menus on the right side of the split screen,
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the for example information from the onboard
following: computer.
▷ The system distinguishes between upper In the divided screen view, the so-called split
and lower-case letters and numbers. To screen, this information remains visible even
make entries, it may be necessary to when you change to another menu.
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to Switching the split screen on/off
page 22.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on 1. Press button.
the Control Display. 2. "Split screen"
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can Selecting the display
be clearly recognized. The set language The display can be selected in menus, where
determines what input is possible. Where the split screen is supported.
necessary, enter special characters via the
Controller. 1. Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad. 2. Press the Controller.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right
in the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map

The map in the navigation system can be
3. Select the desired setting.
moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation Specifying the number of displays
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐ It is possible to specify the number of displays.
rection. 1. Move the Controller to the right until the
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐ split screen is selected.
map. pad with fingers. 2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
Display menu. Tap once.
4. Select desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
23
At a glance iDrive
Status information Entertainment
General information Symbol Meaning

The status field can be found in the upper area CD/DVD player.
of the Control Display. Status information is
displayed in the form of symbols. Music collection.
Bluetooth audio.
Status field symbols
USB audio interface.
Radio
Mobile phone audio interface.
Symbol Meaning WiFi.
HD Radio station is being received. iPod.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Additional symbols
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning Check Control message.
Incoming or outgoing call. The sound output has been

switched off.
Missed call.
Encrypted connection not active.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Request for the current vehicle po‐
Network search.
sition.
Cellular network is not available.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
The critical charge state of the mo‐ tion.
bile phone has been reached.
Roaming is active.
Programmable memory
SMS text message received.
buttons
Message received.
General information
Reminder.
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
Sending not possible. grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
Contacts are loaded. tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Saving a function
1. Select function via iDrive.
24
iDrive At a glance
2. Press and hold the desired button

until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This

means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
25
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
To set the language, refer to page 29.
to the selected options or country versions. Using voice activation
and systems. When using these functions and Activating the voice activation system
must be observed. 1. Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
Concept 3. Say the command.
Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐ This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
play can be operated by voice commands via cates that the voice activation system is active.
the voice activation system. The system sup‐ If no other commands are possible, operate
ports you with announcements during input. the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation

General information system
▷ Functions that can only be used when the Briefly press the button on the steer‐
vehicle is stationary can only be operated ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
via the voice activation system to a limited
extent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on Possible commands
the driver's side.
Most menu items on the Control Display can
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
be voiced as commands.
instructions to use with the voice activation
system. Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ You may select list entries such as phone list
sis, and speed. entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
▷ Always say commands in the language of
respective list.
the voice activation system.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Requirements
Control Display:
Via the Control Display, set a language that is ▷ Some possible commands for the current
also supported by the voice activation system menu.
26
Voice activation system At a glance
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐ Selecting the input language
nus. For some languages, the input language can
▷ Status of the voice recognition. be selected.
▷ Encrypted connection is not available. About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Help on the voice activation system
2. "iDrive settings"
▷ To have information on the operating prin‐
ciple of the voice activation system read 3. "Language"
out loud: ›General information on voice 4. "Voice control:"
control‹. 5. Select desired setting.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹. Activating voice recognition via the
server
The voice recognition feature via the server
One example: opening the provides a dictation function and a natural
tone settings method of entering destinations while improv‐
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the
The commands of the menu items are spoken
functions, data is transmitted to a service pro‐
just as they are selected via the Controller.
vider and locally stored there.
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if Using iDrive:
needed.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. Press button on the steering 2. "iDrive settings"
wheel. 3. "Language"
3. ›Media and radio‹ 4. "Server speech recognition"
4. ›Tone‹
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
Adjusting voice activation system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
Setting the voice dialog interrupted, for instance due to background
Set system to standard dialog or use a short noise or talking.
version. Using iDrive:
The short version of the voice dialog plays 1. "My Vehicle"
back short messages in abbreviated form.
About iDrive:
3. "Language"
1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Speaking during voice output"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:" Adjusting the volume
5. Select desired setting. Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
27
At a glance Voice activation system
▷ The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the drive profile
currently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 246, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and convertible
top closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
28
General settings At a glance
General settings
Vehicle features and options The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
specific and optional features offered with the Setting the time
About iDrive:
to the selected options or country versions. 1. "My Vehicle"
This also applies to safety-related functions 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
must be observed. 4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
Language 6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
Setting the language
nutes are displayed.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
2. "iDrive settings" rently used.
3. "Language"
Setting the time format
4. "Language:"
About iDrive:
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
rently used. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
Setting the voice dialog
4. "Time format:"
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Time
Automatic time setting
Setting the time zone Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
About iDrive: the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
1. "My Vehicle"
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
29
At a glance General settings
3. "Date and time" Via iDrive:

4. "Automatic time setting" 1. "My Vehicle"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ 2. "iDrive settings"
rently used.
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
Date 5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
Setting the date rently used.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
3. "Date and time"
position
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is Concept
displayed. If vehicle location has been activated, the cur‐
6. Press the Controller. rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
7. Make the settings for the month and year. corresponding ConnectedDrive app or in the
ConnectedDrive customer portal.
rently used.
Activating/deactivating
Using iDrive:
Setting the date format
About iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings"
2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Vehicle tracking"
3. "Date and time" 4. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select desired setting. Activating/deactivating
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ popup windows
rently used.
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti‐
Setting the units of vated or deactivated.
measurement
1. "My Vehicle"
You can set the units of measurement for
some values, for example, fuel consumption, 2. "iDrive settings"
distances and temperature. 3. "Pop-ups"
30
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. "Contents of main menu"
rently used. 3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
Control Display rently used.
Brightness
Via iDrive: Messages
1. "My Vehicle"
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐
3. "Displays"
riving in the vehicle in list form.
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness" General information
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ The following messages can be displayed:
ness is set. ▷ Traffic messages.
7. Press the controller. ▷ Check Control messages.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ ▷ Communication messages, for example e-
rently used. mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ▷ Service requirements messages.
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Screen saver
If no settings are made via iDriver, after a time Retrieving messages
that can be set, a screen saver is displayed.
About iDrive:
About iDrive:
1. "Notifications"
1. "My Vehicle"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
3. "Displays" message is displayed.
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver" Deleting messages
6. Select desired setting. All messages, except Check Control mes‐
sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ Control messages are displayed as long as
rently used. they are relevant.
About iDrive:
Selecting the contents of the main
menu 1. "Notifications"
For some menu items of the main menu, the 2. Select the desired message.
displayed contents can be selected.
1. Press button.
31
4. "Data privacy"
3. Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications" Deleting personal in the vehicle
Settings The concept

The following settings can be adjusted: Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐ personal data, such as stored radio stations.
sages will be permitted. These personal data can be permanently de‐
▷ Sort the messages according to date or leted through iDrive.
priority.
General information
Via iDrive:
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
1. "My Vehicle" lowing data can be deleted:
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Profile settings.
3. "Notifications" ▷ Stored radio stations.
4. Select the desired setting. ▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Travel and onboard computer information.
▷ Music collection.
Data protection
▷ Navigation, for example stored destina‐
Data transfer tions.
▷ Phone book.
Concept ▷ Online data, for example Favorites, cook‐
The vehicle offers different functions, whose ies.
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv‐ ▷ Office data, for example voice notes.
ice provider. The data transfer can be deacti‐
vated for some functions. ▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
General information to 15 minutes.
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used. Functional requirement
Only make these settings while stationary. Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data Deleting data

transfer Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
Follow the instructions on the Control Display. trol Display.
Using iDrive: Using iDrive:
1. Switch on the ignition. 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle" 2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings" 3. "iDrive settings"

4. "Data privacy"
32
5. "Delete personal data" Connection type Function

6. "Delete personal data"
Mobile device via Using the Internet.
7. "OK" the Internet hot‐
8. Exit and lock the vehicle. spot.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐ USB memory de‐ Exporting and importing
pleted. vice via USB port. driver profiles.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐ Performing software up‐
letion. dates.
Exporting and importing
Canceling deletion
stored trips.
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Playing music.
Apple iPhone via Use Apple CarPlay apps

Connections Apple CarPlay via iDrive and voice oper‐
ation, see the Owner's
Concept Manual for Navigation,
Mobile devices, such as mobile phones or lap‐ Entertainment and Com‐
tops, can be connected to the vehicle in differ‐ munication.
ent ways and used.
Safety information
General information
WARNING
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle: Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
▷ Bluetooth.
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
▷ Internet hotspot. lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
▷ Apple CarPlay accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
Paired devices are automatically recognized
stop and use the systems and devices while
later on and connected to the vehicle.
the vehicle is stationary.◀
The following functions are possible:
Connection type Function Displaying the device list

Mobile phone via Making calls. All devices paired and/or connected with the
Bluetooth. vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Office functions.
Using iDrive:
Audio player/ Playing music.
smartphone via 1. "My Vehicle"
Bluetooth or USB 2. "iDrive settings"
port. 3. "Mobile devices"
Smartphone via Using apps. A symbol indicates, for which function a device
Bluetooth or USB is used.
port.
33
Symbol Function ▷ The device is ready for operation.

▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
"Telephone"
the vehicle, refer to page 34.
"Additional telephone" ▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on
the device, for instance visibility, refer to
"Bluetooth® audio"
the owner's manual of the device.
"Apps" ▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits should be defined as the Blue‐
"Internet hotspot"
tooth passkey. Required for one-time pair‐
"Apple CarPlay" ing only.
Activating Bluetooth
Bluetooth connection
About iDrive:
Compatible devices 1. "My Vehicle"
General information 2. "iDrive settings"
Details on which mobile devices with a Blue‐ 3. "Mobile devices"

tooth interface are supported can be obtained 4. "Settings"
from www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. 5. "Bluetooth®"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions. Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
Displaying the vehicle identification To use all supported functions of a mobile
number and software part number phone, the following functions must be acti‐
The vehicle identification number and software vated prior to pairing.
part number are needed to determine which Using iDrive:
devices are supported. The software version of
the mobile phone may also be required. 1. "My Vehicle"
About iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings"

3. "Mobile devices"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
3. "Mobile devices"
▷ "Office"
4. "Settings"
Activate function to transmit short
5. "Bluetooth® info"
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
6. "System information" notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
A software update, refer to page 38, can be Costs can be incurred by transmitting
performed, if needed. all data to the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Functional requirements Activate function to show the contact
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle. pictures.
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 34. 6. Move the Controller to the left.
34
Pairing the mobile device with the ▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB in‐
vehicle terface.
Using iDrive: The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
1. "My Vehicle"
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
2. "iDrive settings" serted.
3. "Mobile devices" ▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
4. "Connect new device" MP3 player.
5. Select the functions for which the device is ▷ USB storage devices.
to be used: Common file systems are supported.
▷ "Telephone" FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
▷ "Bluetooth® audio" formats.
▷ "Apps" Information about compatible USB media can

be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ or deviating software versions.
played on the Control Display.
The following applications are possible:
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
of the mobile device. ▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
fer to page 54.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display. ▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. ▷ Playing videos via USB video.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control ▷ Loading of software updates, refer to

number is displayed or the control number page 38.
must be entered. Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Compare the control number displayed ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
on the Control Display with the control nector into the USB interface.
number on the display of the device. ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
Confirm the control number on the de‐ ▷ Protect the USB storage device against
vice and on the Control Display. mechanical damage.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control ▷ Due to the large number of USB media
number on the device and via iDrive. available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
The device is connected and displayed in anteed that every device is operable on the
the device list. vehicle.
If connection was not successful: Frequently ▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
Asked Questions, refer to page 39. ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
USB connection of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
General information techniques, proper playback of the media
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐ stored on the USB storage device cannot
nected to the USB interface. be guaranteed in all cases.
35
▷ A connected USB storage device will be Activating the Internet hotspot

supplied with charging current via the USB Using iDrive:
interface if the device supports this. At
higher temperatures, the USB storage de‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
vice may cause a reduction in the charging 2. "iDrive settings"
current. 3. "Mobile devices"
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the 4. "Settings"
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it is 5. "Internet hotspot"
connected to the USB interface.
Connecting device with Internet
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
hotspot
is being used, settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer to the own‐ Using iDrive:
er's manual of the device. 1. "My Vehicle"
Not compatible USB media: 2. "iDrive settings"
▷ USB hard drives. 3. "Mobile devices"
▷ USB hubs. 4. "Connect new device"
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐ 5. "Internet hotspot"
serts.
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
▷ HFS-formatted USB media. played on the Control Display.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps. 6. Search for WiFi networks on the device.
Select network name on the device.
Connecting the device 7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐ nect.
ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
With the first Internet usage via the Internet
page 186.
hotspot, data volume must be purchased from
The USB storage device is connected to the a service provider.
vehicle and displayed in the device list.
All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
use this data volume.
Internet connection
If necessary, data volume can be purchased
General information from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the In‐

Settings
ternet hotspot.
The network name and hotspot code can be
Functional requirements changed. In addition, the network name can be
hidden so that it cannot be found by other de‐
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
vices.
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
Via iDrive:
▷ WiFi-capable device.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ WiFi activated on the device.
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle.
3. "Mobile devices"
▷ The ignition is switched on.
36
Connecting a specific device

4. Press button.
About iDrive:
5. ▷ "Change hotspot key"
1. "My Vehicle"
Enter the desired hotspot code.
▷ "Change hotspot name"
3. "Mobile devices"
Enter the desired network name.
4. Select device.
▷ "Hide hotspot"
5. "Connect device"
Activate or deactivate the function.
The functions that were assigned to the device
6. To confirm entry of the hotspot code or the
before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐
name of the network:
vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐
Select the symbol. ready connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Additional functions
Disconnecting the device
Following the initial pairing
The connection of the device to the vehicle is
▷ The device is connected with the vehicle disconnected.
within a short period of time if the engine is
The device remains paired and can be con‐
running or ignition is switched on.
nected again, refer to page 37.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
Via iDrive:
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be 2. "iDrive settings"
necessary, e.g., authorization, see owner's 3. "Mobile devices"
manual of the device.
4. Select device.
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
5. "Disconnect device"
tomatically recognized and reconnected
when the ignition is switched on.
Deleting the device
Configuring the device The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices. About iDrive:
Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings"
2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices"
3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device.
4. Select the desired device. 5. "Delete device"
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the de‐
vice will be disconnected.
37
Swapping the telephone and About iDrive:

additional phone
1. Store the file for the software update in the
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐ main directory of a USB flash drive.
hicle, the functions of the phone and additional
2. Connect the USB data storage to an USB
phone can be switched.
interface.
Using iDrive:
3. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 4. "iDrive settings"
2. "iDrive settings" 5. "Software update"
3. "Mobile devices" 6. "Update software"
4. "Settings" 7. "USB"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
Software update
10. Await the updating.
General information 11. Confirm system restart.
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, e.g., mobile phones and MP3 players. Updating software via BMW
Software updates are available for many of the Teleservices
supported devices. The vehicle is maintained Updating software via BMW Teleservices is
up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐ country-specific and may not be available.
dates. The software is first transferred into the vehicle
Updates and related current information is and can then be installed. The software can be
available at www.bmw.com/update. installed at a time different from the time of
transfer.
Displaying the installed software The software can be transferred while driving,
version and if the trip is interrupted it will resume auto‐
The software version installed in the vehicle is matically the next time the vehicle is driven. All
displayed. other functions remain available during the
About iDrive: transfer. Cellular network reception must be
available for the transfer to take place.
1. "My Vehicle"
The software may only be updated when the
2. "iDrive settings" vehicle is stationary.
3. "Software update" Using iDrive:
4. "Show current version"
1. "My Vehicle"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional infor‐
mation. 3. "Software update"
4. "Update software"
Updating software via USB 5. "Teleservices"
The software may only be updated when the 6. "Load update"
vehicle is stationary.
The update is loaded but not installed.
38
7. Install or delete the update. that, the mobile device does not function as
▷ "Install software" expected.
The loaded update is installed. In this case, the following explanations can
help:
This step can be carried out at a later
point in time. Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ "Remove update"
▷ Check that WiFi is activated in the vehicle.
The loaded update is removed.
Activate WiFi in the vehicle.
The following steps are omitted.
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices
8. "OK"
connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
9. Wait for the update to complete.
Delete connections with other devices, if
10. Confirm system restart. needed.
▷ Delete all known Bluetooth connections
Restoring the software version from the device list on the mobile phone
The software version before the last software prior to connecting.
update and the version before the first soft‐
Start new device search.
ware update can be restored.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
The software may only be restored when the
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in
About iDrive:
adapter, wireless charging tray or via the
1. "My Vehicle" charging cable.
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
3. "Software update" sible that only one mobile phone can be
connected to the vehicle.
4. "Restore software"
Unpair the connected mobile phone from
5. ▷ "Previous version"
the vehicle and pair and connect only one
The previous software version is re‐ mobile phone.
stored. Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ "Default software settings" ▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
The first software version is restored. not function anymore.
6. "Remove software" Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
7. "OK" ▷ Possibly too high or too low ambient tem‐
8. Wait for restore. peratures for mobile phone operation.
9. Confirm system restart. Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
Frequently asked questions Why are no telephone functions available?
Information on compatible mobile phones, re‐ ▷ The mobile phone may not be properly
fer to page 34. configured, e.g., as Bluetooth audio device.
All requirements are met and all required steps Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
were completed in the specified order. Despite phone or additional phone function.
39
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐

played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, e.g.,
due to stored information such as notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone
function.
Why is the phone connection quality poor?
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
40
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Keyword search
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Videos
to the selected options or country versions. The basic functions of selected systems are
This also applies to safety-related functions explained in the videos.
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Select components
must be observed.
1. Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
Integrated Owner's Manual 3. "Owner's Manual"
in the vehicle 4. Select desired setting.
Concept Scrolling through the owner's manual

The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically Turn Controller, until the next or previous con‐
describes features and functions found in the tents are displayed.
vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display. Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
Components of the Integrated
You may open the relevant information di‐
Owner's Manual
rectly.
The Integrated owner's manual consists of
four parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ Opening via iDrive
mation or possible access.
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
1. Press button.
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a 2. "Owner's Manual"
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving. Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Search by images Directly from the Check Control message on
Image search provides information and de‐ the Control Display:
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ "Owner's Manual"
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
41
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Changing between a function and the

operating instructions
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display
and to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last

displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of

the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5.
Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the Programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 24, and called up directly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2. Press desired button and hold for

more than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played via the selected entry point.
42
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
43
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
series. It also describes features that are not Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
to the selected options or country versions. tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
This also applies to safety-related functions the vehicle from the outside when there are
and systems. When using these functions and people in it.◀
WARNING
must be observed.
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
Remote control
tions:
General information ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
trols with integrated key. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
Each remote control contains a replaceable dows.
battery. Replace the battery, refer to ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
page 48.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
You may set the key functions depending on
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 56.
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
The vehicle stores personal settings for every exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
remote control. Driver profile, refer to
page 54.
Overview
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 239.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take 1 Unlocking
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
2 Locking
can be opened from the outside.◀
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode
46
Opening and closing Controls
Unlocking The windows are opened, as long as the but‐

ton on the remote control is pressed.
Press button on the remote control.
With Comfort Access:
Depending on the settings, refer to page 56, If close to the vehicle, the hardtop is also
the following access points are unlocked. opened.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap. Press and hold this button on the re‐
Press the button of the remote control mote control until the hardtop is fully
again to unlock the other vehicle access opened and the hardtop well storage cover is
points. fully closed.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the
In addition, the following functions are exe‐ motion.
cuted:
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐ Locking
fer to page 54, are applied. 1. Close the driver's door.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. Switching 2. Press button on the remote control.
the interior lights on and off manually, refer ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
to page 115. are being locked.
▷ The exterior lighting activated in the set‐ ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 57, is
tings, refer to page 56, is switched on. switched on.
▷ Automatically folded in exterior mirrors are If the engine or ignition is still switched on
folded open. This function must be acti‐ when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
vated in the settings. honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 57, is must be switched off by means of the Start/
switched off. Stop button.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
With Comfort Access: convenient
ent brightness.
closing
Convenient opening
Safety information
Safety information WARNING
WARNING With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
ing and closing the hardtop. There is a risk of
during convenient closing.◀
injury. When opening and closing the hardtop,
observe the movement and keep the area of WARNING
movement clear.◀
ing and closing the hardtop. There is a risk of
Opening injury. When opening and closing the hardtop,
Press and hold this button on the re‐ observe the movement and keep the area of
mote control. movement clear.◀
47
Closing Safety information

Press and hold this button on the remote WARNING
control in the area close to the vehicle. Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
The windows and hardtop close.
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
Press and hold the button of the remote con‐ is clear during opening and closing.◀
trol, until the hardtop and the hardtop well
storage cover are fully closed. NOTE
Releasing the button or leaving the vicinity of During opening, the tailgate pivots back
the vehicle stops the motion. and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
Switching on interior lights and tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
courtesy light
Press button on the remote control with Opening
the vehicle locked. Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
This function is not available, if the interior
lights were switched off manually. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐ ward.
ent brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing Panic mode
the button again. You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Tailgate ▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
General information onds.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
the remote control in the cargo area.
trol three times in succession.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify To switch off the alarm: press any button.
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the Replacing the battery
settings, refer to page 56. 1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐
The tailgate can normally not be opened if the mote control, refer to page 50.
hardtop is not fully opened or closed. If the tail‐ 2. Place the integrated key underneath the
gate can be opened, make sure it does not col‐ battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lide with the hardtop well storage cover.
48
lift the cover with a lever movement of the Malfunction

integrated key, arrow 2.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 48.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow transmission towers or other equipment
using a pointed object and lift it out. with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
4. Insert a type CR 2450 battery with the pos‐
itive side facing up. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
5. Press the cover closed.
stance charging of a mobile phone.
6. Push the integrated key into the remote
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
control until it engages.
the wireless charging tray.
Have old batteries disposed of by a Place the remote control down at a differ‐
dealer’s service center or another ent location.
qualified service center or repair shop
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
or take them to a collection point.
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 50.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls

A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
49
Starting the engine via emergency NOTE

detection of the remote control The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Removing
1. Hold the remote control with its back

against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

Integrated key integrated key, arrow 2.
General information Locking/unlocking via the door lock

The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key can also be used for the
glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐ Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
ble with special knowledge. lock using the integrated key.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ The other doors must be unlocked or locked
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ from the inside.
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are Alarm system
people in it.◀
The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key.
50
The alarm system is triggered when the door is door, the second time opens it. The other
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via doors remain locked.
the door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ Comfort Access
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 50. Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
Button for central locking All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
system trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
General information control when it is in close proximity or in the
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is vehicle's interior.
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on. General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
Overview tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Opening tailgate.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Button for the central locking system.
Unlocking
Unlocking and locking
Press button. For locking, the doors must be
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Opening
▷ Press button to unlock the doors Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
together, and then pull the door handle passenger door completely.
above the armrest. This corresponds with pressing the button
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door on the remote control.
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
51
Locking Opening
Touch the surface on the door handle of the Press button on the tailgate.
driver's or front passenger door with your fin‐ This corresponds with pressing the button
ger for approx. 1 second without grasping the on the remote control.
door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
on the remote control. ward.
Malfunction
Open tailgate
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
General information
ces:
If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access,
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
locked doors will not be unlocked.
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place page 48.
transmission towers or other equipment
Safety information
with high transmitting power.
WARNING ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ metal objects.
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make Do not transport the remote control to‐
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate gether with metal objects.
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE mobile phones or other electronic devices
During opening, the tailgate pivots back in direct proximity to the remote control.
and up. There is a risk of property damage. Do not transport the remote control to‐
Make sure that the area of movement of the gether with electronic devices.
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀ In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 50.
52
Tailgate Press button on the tailgate.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐

General information
trol for approx. 1 second.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and mote control, refer to page 48.
the country version, it is possible to specify
The tailgate opens slightly and can be swung
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
upward.
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 56.
Opening from the inside
The tailgate can normally not be opened if the
hardtop is not fully opened or closed. If the tail‐ With the vehicle stationary, press the
gate can be opened, make sure it does not col‐ button in the driver's floor area.
lide with the hardtop well storage cover.
Closing
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage. Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀ The loading aid, refer to
page 187, can be operated us‐
Opening and closing ing the tailgate buttons.
Opening from the outside
Trunk emergency unlocking
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
have the remote control with you.
53
The tailgate unlocks. ▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own
remote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
Driver profile ▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for Settings
several drivers can be stored and called up The settings for the following systems and
again when required. functions are stored in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings depends on country
General information and equipment.
There are three driver profiles with which per‐ ▷ Unlocking and locking.
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐ ▷ Lights.
mote control has one of these driver profiles
▷ Climate control.
assigned.
▷ Radio.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be ▷ Instrument cluster.
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐ ▷ Programmable memory buttons.
file are automatically applied. ▷ Volumes, tone.
If several drivers use their own remote control, ▷ Control Display.
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
▷ Navigation.
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the ▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
meantime by a person with a different remote ▷ Rearview camera.
control.
▷ Side View.
Changes to the settings are automatically
▷ Top View.
stored in the driver profile currently activated.
▷ Head-up Display.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings stored in it will be applied auto‐ ▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
matically. The new driver profile is assigned to ▷ Intelligent Safety.
the remote control currently used. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control. It Profile management
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles. Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
Functional requirements ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐
For the system to be able to identify the driver lows you to call up personal vehicle settings,
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐ even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your
tected remote control must be clearly allo‐ own remote control.
cated to the driver.
This is the case when:
54
Using iDrive: Resetting a driver profile

1. "My Vehicle" The settings of the driver profile currently in
use are reset to their factory settings.
2. "Driver profiles"
Using iDrive:
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK" 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver 2. "Driver profiles"
profile are automatically applied. 3. Select driver profile.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to The driver profile marked with this sym‐
the remote control being used at the time. bol can be reset.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a 4. "Reset driver profile"
different remote control, this driver profile 5. "OK"
will apply to both remote controls.
Exporting driver profiles
Using a guest profile
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
The guest profile is for individual settings that exported.
are stored in none of the three personal driver
Exporting can be helpful for storing and re‐
profiles.
trieving personal settings, for instance before
Using iDrive: delivering the vehicle to a workshop. The
1. "My Vehicle" stored driver profiles can be taken into another
vehicle.
Using iDrive:
3. "Drive off (guest)"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not 2. "Driver profiles"
assigned to the current remote control. 3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
Renaming a driver profile bol can be exported.
A personal name can be assigned to the active 4. "Export driver profile"
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profiles.
driver profile.
Using iDrive:
▷ "USB device"
1. "My Vehicle" Select USB storage device, as needed,
2. "Driver profiles" refer to page 35.
3. Select driver profile. ▷ Online.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be renamed. Importing driver profiles
4. "Change driver profile name" The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the im‐
5. Enter profile name.
ported driver profile.
6. Select the symbol.
55
Using iDrive: Settings

1. "My Vehicle"
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
the country version, various settings for open‐
The driver profile marked with this sym‐ ing and closing are possible.
bol can be overwritten.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
4. "Import driver profile" refer to page 54, currently used.
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile. Unlocking
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Doors
Select USB storage device as needed.
Using iDrive:
▷ Online.
1. "My Vehicle"
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
2. "Vehicle settings"
Displaying driver profiles during start 3. "Doors/Key"
The driver profiles can be displayed during 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
each start to select the desired profile.
Via iDrive:
▷ "Driver's door only"
1. "My Vehicle" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
2. "Driver profiles" flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
▷ "All doors"
System limits The entire vehicle is unlocked.
A clear assignment between the remote con‐
trol and driver may not be possible in the fol‐ Tailgate
lowing cases, for example. Depending on optional features and country
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his version, this setting is not offered in some
or her own remote control, but another cases.
person is driving. Using iDrive:
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
1. "My Vehicle"
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her. 2. "Vehicle settings"
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not 3. "Doors/Key"

locked and unlocked. 4. "Tailgate" or "Tailgate and
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐ door(s)"
side of the vehicle. 5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate unlocks.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
56
The tailgate and the doors are un‐ After the engine is switched off by pressing
locked. the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is
automatically unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Using iDrive: Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
1. "My Vehicle"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
2. "Vehicle settings" and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
3. "Doors/Key" tions.
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ Using iDrive:
mation signals.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
3. Select driver profile.
locking by one.
The setting can be made for the driver
▷ With alarm system:
profile marked with this symbol.
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
4. "Last seat position automatic"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
Alarm system
Automatic locking
Using iDrive: General information
1. "My Vehicle" When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
3. "Doors/Key"
or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ "Lock automatically"
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
The vehicle locks automatically after a tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
short period of time if no door is the vehicle.
opened after unlocking.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
The vehicle locks automatically after ally and acoustically:
you drive off.
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Automatic unlocking Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
tic alarm may be suppressed.
Using iDrive:
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
1. "My Vehicle" tem.
2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
57
Switching on and off are not correctly closed. Correctly closed

When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the access points are secured.
remote control or with Comfort Access, the When the still open access points are
alarm system is switched on and off at the closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
same time. sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlock‐
Opening the doors with the alarm ing:
system switched on
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
opened if the door was unlocked using the
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
integrated key in the door lock.
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 59.
An alarm has been triggered.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find Tilt alarm sensor
yourself in a dangerous situation. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐ The alarm system responds in situations such
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐ as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
onds. cle is towed.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
Interior motion sensor
The car's interior is monitored to the height of
To switch off the alarm: press any button. the seats. The alarm system is switched on to‐
gether with the interior motion sensor even
Indicator light on the interior mirror when the hardtop is open. Falling objects such
as leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every ▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
2 seconds: ▷ In duplex garages.
The alarm system is switched on. ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐ cles, at sea or on a trailer.
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐ ▷ With animals in the vehicle.
onds:
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor sensor can be switched off in such situations.
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
58
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
interior motion sensor ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
Press the remote control button again There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
is locked. hicle. Take the remote control with you when
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ Overview
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm

▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 49.
▷ With Comfort Access:
Power windows
If you are carrying the remote control on
your person, grasp the door handle on the
driver's or front passenger door com‐
Opening individually
pletely.
▷ Press the switch to the resistance

point.
Power windows
The window opens while the switch is be‐
Safety information ing held.
WARNING ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐

When operating the windows, body parts ance point.
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of The window opens automatically. Pressing
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure the switch again stops the motion.
that the area of movement of the windows is
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
clear during opening and closing.◀
fer to page 47.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
Opening together
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
point.
tions:
All windows open while the switch is being
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
held.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
dows. ance point.
59
All windows open automatically. Closing without the jam protection

Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐ system
tion. In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
Closing individually lows:
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance 1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point. point and hold it there.
The window closes while the switch is be‐ The window closes with limited jam pro‐
ing held. tection . If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance
With the door closed, the front windows point again within approx. 4 seconds and
close automatically. Pulling the switch hold it there.
again stops the motion. The rear windows The window closes without jam protec‐
close while the switch is being held. tion .
Convenient closing via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 47.
Hardtop
Closing together
Pull the switch to or beyond the resist‐ General information
ance point. The hardtop can be opened and closed at
All windows are closed while the switch is be‐ walking speed.
ing held. If the vehicle is accelerated while the hardtop is
in motion, the movement is stopped.
Pinch protection system Observe the following information:
▷ The tailgate can normally not be opened if
General information the hardtop is not fully opened or closed. If
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as the tailgate can be opened, make sure it
a window closes, closing is interrupted. does not collide with the convertible top
well storage cover.
The window opens slightly.
▷ Close the hardtop when the vehicle is
Safety information parked. A closed hardtop protects vehicle
from weather-related damage and against
WARNING theft.
Accessories on the windows such as an‐ ▷ It is not possible to start the engine and
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a operate the hardtop simultaneously. When
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the the engine is started using the Start/Stop
area of movement of the windows.◀ button or using the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion, the hardtop movement is briefly inter‐
rupted.
60
▷ Opening a door interrupts closure of the WARNING

hardtop. When operating the hardtop while driv‐
▷ Observe the information on loading the ing, the view to the rear may be limited. There
cargo area, refer to page 186. is a danger of accidents and property damage.
▷ In order to protect the battery, move the When operating the hardtop while driving, ob‐
hardtop only when the engine is running if serve traffic attentively and if necessary, re‐
possible. duce speed. Do not operate while backing up
or with wind.◀
▷ Before closing the hardtop, remove any
foreign objects from the windshield frame; WARNING
otherwise, closing may be prevented.
The hardtop is not suitable for the
mounting of roof carrier systems. The roof car‐
Safety information rier could come loose. There is risk of an acci‐
NOTE dent. Do not attach any roof carrier systems to
Incorrect operation can damage the the hardtop.◀
hardtop and other parts of the vehicle.
NOTE
There is a risk of property damage. During op‐
With a mounted bicycle carrier on the
eration, heed the following points:
trailer hitch, the tailgate can hit the bicycle car‐
▷ Keep the area of movement of the hardtop rier while operating the hardtop. There is a risk
clear because the hardtop swivels out up‐ of property damage. Do not open or close the
ward. Area of movement: 79 Inches/2 me‐ hardtop when a bicycle carrier is mounted on
ters. the trailer hitch.◀
▷ Fully close the tailgate.
NOTE
▷ Do not place objects on the hardtop.
Objects on the cargo area partition or
▷ Do not open the hardtop, if it is wet, cov‐ pieces of luggage in the side area of the cargo
ered in snow, iced up, or dirty. area can limit the area of movement of the
▷ The rollover protection system may not be hardtop and the loading aid. There is a risk of
triggered. property damage. Make sure that the move‐
▷ Do not operate hardtop on uneven sec‐ ment area of the hardtop and loading aid is
tions of road. clear during operation.◀
▷ Always open or close the hardtop com‐
pletely. The hardtop is only locked in the fi‐ Overview
nal positions.◀
WARNING
When opening and closing the hardtop,
body parts can be jammed, for example by the
mechanism. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the hardtop is
clear during operation.◀
Hardtop buttons
61
Functional requirements well storage cover is completely closed. Only if

The following requirements must be fulfilled in the hardtop is completely open or closed, will
order to be able to move the hardtop. the hardtop and hardtop well storage cover be
locked.
▷ The ignition or radio-ready state must be
switched on. The hardtop movement is interrupted if the
switch is released. The sequence can be con‐
▷ The cargo area partition, refer to
tinued in the desired direction using the
page 186, is folded down.
switch.
▷ The loading aid, refer to page 186, is shut
down. Operating from the outside
▷ The tailgate is closed. With Comfort Access:
▷ The external temperature is above The hardtop can also be operated from outside
14 ℉/-10 ℃. via Comfort Access.
▷ The voltage of the vehicle electrical system ▷ Convenient opening with remote opera‐
is sufficient. tion, refer to page 47.
▷ The hardtop drive is not overheating. ▷ Convenient closing with the remote con‐
▷ The vehicle speed is not too high. trol, refer to page 47.
▷ The lateral tilt of the vehicle is not too
great. Cargo area partition
▷ The windows can be lowered.
If this requirement is not met, a check control
message is displayed.
Operating from the inside
Opening
Push the switch and hold it.
Fold down cargo area partition in the back so
The windows are rolled down, and the hardtop that the hardtop can be opened.
opens as long as the switch is pulled.
Fold down cargo area partition in the front in
order to enlarge the cargo area capacity when
Closing
the hardtop is closed.
Pull the switch and hold it.
The windows are lowered, the hardtop closes Wind deflector

and the windows are raised again as long as
the switch is pressed. The concept
The wind deflector reduces the air movement
Preventing an interruption in the vehicle interior when driving with the
Push or pull the switch until the hardtop is hardtop down.
completely open or closed and the end of the
procedure is indicated by a Check Control
message. Always make sure that the hardtop
62
Safety information Fold the rear seat backrest rearward.

NOTE
When moving the front seats back, the
wind deflector can be damaged. There is a risk
of property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement is clear prior to moving the front
seats back.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the wind deflector. There is risk of injuries. 3. Fold open the wind deflector.
Make sure that the area of movement around
the wind deflector is clear when installing and
removing it and folding it up.◀
WARNING
Objects placed on the installed wind de‐
flector can be thrown into the car's interior or
endanger other traffic participants, for instance
in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuver. The objects can damage the wind de‐
flector. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
4. Insert wind deflector from one side of the
age to property. Do not place any objects on
vehicle with the pins in the corresponding
the installed wind deflector.◀
fixing points on the opposite side of the ve‐
hicle.
Installation
1. Unlock the rear seat backrest on the left or
right side, arrow 1, and fold forward, ar‐
row 2.
5. Lift the wind deflector in the center, ar‐

row 1, until the pins on the installation side
2. Push transport lock, arrow up.

Remove wind deflector.
63
can be positioned in front of the fixing 2. Place wind deflector in the orientation
points, arrows 2. shown in the picture on the lower fixtures,
arrow 2, and tilt it back.
3. Push the front transport lock down, ar‐
row 3.
6. Press the wind deflector downward, ar‐

rows 1, while inserting the pins in the cor‐
responding fixing points.
Grasp the inner framework of the wind de‐
flector on the recessed grip and fold it up,
arrow 2.
Removing
Proceed in reverse sequence.
1. On vehicles with a through-loading sys‐

tem: fold rear transport locks down, ar‐
row 1.
64
Settings Controls
Settings
Vehicle features and options sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
This chapter describes all standard, country- just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
specific and optional features offered with the the backrest so that it is in the most upright
series. It also describes features that are not position as possible and do not adjust again
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due while driving.◀
This also applies to safety-related functions WARNING
and systems. When using these functions and There is a risk of jamming when moving
systems, the applicable laws and regulations the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
must be observed. property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs Electrically adjustable seats
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. General information
In the event of an accident, the correct seating The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
position plays an important role. Additionally, for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
observe the following chapters for safe driving: is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the function, refer
▷ Seats, refer to page 65.
to page 57, is activated for this purpose.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 68.
The current seat position can be stored using
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 70. the memory function, refer to page 71.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 117.
Overview
Seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀ 1 Memory function
2 Backrest width
WARNING
3 Lumbar support
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt 4 Backrest tilt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a risk of 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
65
Controls Settings
Forward/backward Backrest tilt
Push switch forward or backward. Move switch forward or backward.
Height Thigh support
Push switch up or down. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Seat tilt
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
Move switch up or down.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
66
Settings Controls
Backrest width Switching off

Press and hold the button, until the
General information LEDs go out.
You can change the backrest width by adjust‐
ing the side wings of the backrest.
Air collar
Settings
Concept
▷ Press the front section of
The air collar ensures just the right tempera‐
the button:
ture for the neck area via supply of warm air.
The backrest width de‐
creases. Safety information
▷ Press the rear section of the NOTE
button:
By covering the vent of the air collar, the
The backrest width in‐ heat cannot escape as intended. The heat
creases. builds up. There is a risk of property damage.
Do not cover the vents, e.g., with covers.◀
Front seat heating
WARNING
Overview Very hot air can escape from the vents.
Thus, there is a risk of burns in the immediate
area of the vents. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that sufficient distance from the vents is
maintained. If necessary, adjust the air sup‐
ply.◀
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
Air collar
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐ Switching on
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
Press button once for each level.
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output
is reduced. The maximum temperature and fan
output is reached when three LEDs are lit.
67
Controls Settings
Switching off Overview

Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs are no longer illuminated.
Entering the rear
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of Operation
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ Press the upper/lower section of
justment.◀ the button:
WARNING ▷ Press and hold this button
Unexpected movements of the backrest until the seat has moved to
while driving may occur due to an unlocked the desired position. Releas‐
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There ing the button stops win‐
is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the back‐ dow/roof movement.
rests before driving.◀ ▷ Press button briefly. The seat automati‐
cally moves to the respective end position.
Folding down the backrest Pressing again stops the motion.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.

Fold back and locking the backrest
After entering the rear, fold the backrest back
and lock it.
Press button. The seat moves to its origi‐
nal position. Pressing again stops the
motion.
Safety belts
2. Fold backrest forward.
Number of safety belts and safety belt
Changing the seat position buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to
Requirements
ensure occupant safety. However, they can
▷ Vehicle at a standstill. only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
▷ When the door is open, the seat is accessi‐
ble from the side on which the door is General information
open. Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
68
Settings Controls
added protection, they are not a substitute for accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
safety belts. other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ Correct use of safety belts
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
Safety information
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
WARNING over your lap. The safety belt may not
If the safety belt is used to buckle more press on your stomach.
than one person, the protective effect of the ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow fragile objects.
more than one person to wear a single safety ▷ Avoid thick clothing.
belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an
occupant's lap, but must be transported and ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
secured in designated child restraint sys‐ ward around your upper body.
tems.◀
Buckling the safety belt
WARNING 1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the
The protective effect of the safety belts holder when fastening it.
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐ 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened buckle. The safety belt buckle must en‐
safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in gage audibly.
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
Unbuckling the safety belt
way.
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐ mechanism.
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
69
Controls Settings
Safety belt reminder for driver's and ▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
passenger's seat directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
Display termined to be safe for attachment to a
The indicator light lights up and a sig‐ head restraint.
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety ▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
belts are positioned correctly. The while driving.◀
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The safety belt re‐ Adjusting the height: basic seat
minder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints

Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
neck area. There is a risk of injury. head restraint down.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats. Adjusting the height: sport seat
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐
ports the back of the head at as close to justed.
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ Adjusting distance
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the

Objects on the head restraint reduce the front.
protective effect in the head and neck area. ▷ Back: press the button and push the head
There is a risk of injury. restraint toward the rear.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
70
Settings Controls
Removing: basic seat Safety information

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be WARNING
sitting in the seat in question.
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory
function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
sistance. justment.◀
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the

head restraint out completely. Overview
Removing: sport seat

The head restraints cannot be removed.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func‐
Storing
tion:
▷ Seat position.
2. Set the desired position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display. 3. Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.
General information
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
Two memory locations with different settings is lit. The LED goes out.
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 54. Button was pressed inadvertently:
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐ Press button again.
lowing settings are not stored: The LED goes out.
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support. Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
71
Controls Settings
The procedure stops when a switch for setting Overview

the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
Calling up of a seat position

deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power. 1 Settings
To reactivate calling up of a seat position: 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
▷ Open and close the door or tailgate. 3 Folding in and out
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button. Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Mirrors Slide the switch.
Exterior mirrors Adjusting electrically
General information Press button.
The mirror on the front passenger side is more The mirror movement follows the but‐
curved than the driver's side mirror. ton movement.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro‐

file currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐ Malfunction
locked via the remote control, the position is In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
page 57, is activated for this purpose. glass.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
page 71. mirror
Safety information Concept
WARNING If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on

the front passenger side is tilted downward.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
This improves your view of the curb and other
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
Activating
an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
72
Settings Controls
2. Engage selector lever position R. Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Deactivating Turn knob

Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Folding in and out

NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
Press button. the interior mirror.
Possible at speeds up to approx. Interior mirror, automatic dimming

15 mph/20 km/h. feature
Fold the mirrors in and out is advantageous in
the following situations: Overview
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Photocells are used for control:
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running. ▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐ Functional requirements
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
mirror are used to control this.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
73
Controls Settings
Steering wheel Switching on/off

Press button.
Safety information
WARNING ▷ On: the LED lights up.
Steering wheel adjustments while driving ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Settings
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
74
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Safety information system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight, and size.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can Safety information
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ WARNING
tions: The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
tems. The protective effect of the safety belts
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
dows. tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
▷ Using vehicle equipment. stance in the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not of injuries or danger to life. Secure children
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child
hicle. Take the remote control with you when restraint systems.◀
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Children on the front passenger seat

Always transport children in the rear
seat General information
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
General information
straint system in the front passenger seat,
Accident research shows that the safest place make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
for children is in the rear seat. on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Transport children younger than 13 years of Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear ger airbags, refer to page 119.
seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
75
Controls Transporting children safely
Safety information center or another qualified service center or re‐

pair shop.◀
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can WARNING
injure a child in a child restraint system when The stability of the child restraint system
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐ is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger adjustment or improper installation of the child
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀ Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
WARNING
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
The stability of the child restraint system and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
adjustment or improper installation of the child possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. straints or remove them.◀
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
On the front passenger seat
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
Deactivating airbags
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ WARNING
straints or remove them.◀ Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
Installing child restraint jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
systems
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
General information After installing a child restraint system in the
Pay attention to the specifications of the child front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
restraint system manufacturer when selecting, knee and side airbags on the front passenger
installing, and using child restraint systems. side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
Safety information automatically, refer to page 119.
WARNING
Seat position and height
The protective effect of damaged child
restraint systems or of child restraint systems Before installing a child restraint system, move
exposed to an accident and their fastening the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
systems can be limited or lost. A child can ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, e.g., in the the best possible position for the belt and to
event of an accident or braking and evasive offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger dent.
to life. Have damaged child restraint systems If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
or of child restraint systems exposed to an ac‐ cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
cident and their fastening systems checked move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service
76
Transporting children safely Controls
til the best possible belt guide position is Locking the safety belt
reached. 1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
Backrest width
safety belt.
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
child restraint system in the front passenger
it tight against the child restraint system.
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
The safety belt is locked.
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Unlocking the safety belt
Child seat security 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger

safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information Safety information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ WARNING
dren.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐ effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or
restraint fixing systems. danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
The lower anchors may be used to attach the curely against the backrest.◀
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child Position
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
77
Controls Transporting children safely
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH symbols.
Before installing LATCH child

restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint

fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Upper LATCH retaining strap

For Canadian customers Only.
The following statement is required by Trans‐
port Canada:
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child re‐
straint system, nor a booster cushion, requiring
the use of a tether strap can be properly se‐
cured in the vehicle.
78
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle features and options To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
This chapter describes all standard, country- electronic systems/power consumers.
series. It also describes features that are not Safety measures
When switching off the ignition, the selector
lever position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
systems, the applicable laws and regulations The ignition is switched off automatically in the
must be observed. following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
Start/Stop button low beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
Concept completely, so that the engine can still be
Pressing the Start/Stop button started.
switches the ignition on or off ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
and starts the engine. the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
Steptronic transmission: the en‐ the low beams are switched off.
gine starts with the brake pedal ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
Ignition on some minutes of no use.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
Radio-ready state
the same time.
General information
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐ sumers remain ready for operation.
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time. Activating
To save battery power when the engine is off, With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary button.
electronic systems/power consumers.
If the engine is not running and the ignition is
switched on: the system automatically acti‐
Ignition off
vates radio-ready state when the door is
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop opened if the lights are switched off or the day‐
button again without stepping on the brake. time running lights are switched on.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
79
Controls Driving
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
stance the ignition is automatically switched turn the front wheels in the direction of the
off for the following reasons: curb.
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights. NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
Switching off automatically or repeated starting in quick succession, the
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐ fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
cally in the following situations: The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with a risk of property damage. Avoid repeated
the Start/Stop button. starting in quick succession.◀
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.

Steptronic transmission
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
Starting the engine
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged 1. Depress the brake pedal.
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
Starting the engine starts.
Safety information
DANGER
Engine stop
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐ Safety information
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ WARNING
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐ Unattended children or animals can
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and tions:
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
WARNING ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ dows.
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
against rolling. ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
against rolling away, observe the following: leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
▷ Set the parking brake. hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
80
Driving Controls
WARNING General information

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move Depending on the selected driving mode, the
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ system is automatically activated or deacti‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle vated.
against rolling. After every start of the engine using the Start/
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
against rolling away, observe the following: the last selected state. When the Auto Start/
▷ Set the parking brake. Stop function is active, it is available when the
vehicle is traveling faster than about
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
3 mph/5 km/h.
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
ing a stop under the following conditions:
chock.◀
Steptronic transmission:
Before driving into a vehicle wash ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash, tion D.
observe instructions for going into an auto‐ ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
matic vehicle wash, refer to page 252. the vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
Steptronic transmission driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
Switching off the engine
when the engine is switched off.
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped. Displays in the instrument cluster
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The READY display in the tach‐
The engine is switched off. ometer signals that the Auto
The radio-ready state is switched on. Start/Stop function is ready to
3. Set the parking brake. start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the

Auto Start/Stop function conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic Functional limitations
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The The engine is not switched off automatically in
engine starts again automatically for driving the following situations:
off. ▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
81
Controls Driving
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated Functional limitations
or cooled to the required level. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
ature. lowing situations:
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
steering wheel is being turned. when the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
matic climate control is switched on. lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
▷ At higher elevations. lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ The hood is unlocked. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Air collar is activated.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
the heating is switched on.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N,
M/S or R. Activating/deactivating the system
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. manually
Starting the engine Using the button

The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
brake pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met: Press button.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open. ▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
The engine is started during an automatic
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
engine stop.
length of time.
The engine can only be stopped or started
The engine can only be started via the Start/
via the Start/Stop button.
Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
82
Driving Controls
Switching off the vehicle during an ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

automatic engine stop also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle chock.◀
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it. Applying
Steptronic transmission: The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function The indicator lamp lights up red. The
is deactivated. parking brake is set.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
matically. models
2. Set the parking brake.

If for once use during driving is required, en‐
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
button down.
Automatic deactivation
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐ tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐ while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
sons, e.g., if no driver is detected.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer Releasing
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
Parking brake
Safety information
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
WARNING
the lever down.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle Turn signal, high beams,
against rolling.
headlight flasher
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following: Turn signal
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Turn signal in exterior mirror
turn the front wheels in the direction of the When driving and during operation of the turn
curb. signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
83
Controls Driving
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights

on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Press the lever past the resistance point. Washer/wiper system

Triple turn signal activation General information
Lightly tap the lever up or down. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
The turn signal flashes three times.
them to become worn more quickly.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
Using iDrive: Safety information
1. "My Vehicle" WARNING
2. "Vehicle settings" If the wipers start moving in the folded
3. "Lighting" away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
4. "Exterior lighting"
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
5. "One-touch turn signal" Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
6. Select the desired setting. when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
Settings are stored for the profile currently
on.◀
used.
NOTE
Signaling briefly
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
it there for as long as you want the turn signal motor can overheat when switching on. There
to flash. is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
84
Driving Controls
Switching on Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the
Press the lever up until the desired position is rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐
reached. tion is preset.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.

Safety information
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
tion 1. NOTE
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
The wipers switch to intermittent operation washes. There is a risk of property damage.
when the vehicle is stationary. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
The wipers change to their normal speed Activating/deactivating
when the vehicle comes to a standstill.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐
tem switched on: when travel continues, the
wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐

tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Press the lever down.

▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
85
Controls Driving
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Cleaning the windshield

the rain sensor
Pull the lever.

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
or sensitivity of the rain sensor. shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor. In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
switched on.
sensor.
Windshield washer nozzles
Windshield and headlight The washer jets are automatically heated
washer system whenever the ignition is switched on.
Safety information Fold-away position of the wipers

WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
Concept
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use shield in the fold-away position.
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀ General information
Important, e.g., when changing the wiper
NOTE blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, tions.
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use Safety information
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
WARNING
ervoir is empty.◀
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
86
Driving Controls
NOTE Washer fluid

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper General information
motor can overheat when switching on. There All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the ervoir.
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
Folding away the wipers washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
1. Switch the ignition on and off again. be used.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until Recommended minimum fill quantity:
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐ 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
tion.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
windshield. regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
Folding down the wipers injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
wiper system must be reactivated.
ervoir.◀
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield. NOTE
2. Switch on the ignition. Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
their resting position and are ready again
ing system. There is a risk of property damage.
for operation.
87
Controls Driving
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the Safety information

washer fluid.◀
WARNING
NOTE An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Mixing different windshield washer con‐ and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐ cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ against rolling.
erty. Do not mix different windshield washer In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
concentrates or antifreeze. Observe the infor‐ against rolling away, observe the following:
mation and mixing ratios provided on the con‐ ▷ Set the parking brake.
tainers.◀
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
Overview curb.
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐ automatically.
gine compartment.
Reverse R
Malfunction Engage selector lever position R only when the
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
Neutral N
+5 ℉/-15 ℃. In selector lever position N, the vehicle may be
pushed or roll without engine power, for in‐
stance in vehicle washes; see the Care chap‐
Steptronic transmission ter.
Concept Parking position P

The Steptronic transmission combines the Selector lever position, for instance for parking
functions of an automatic transmission with the vehicle.
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed. The transmission blocks the drive wheels in
selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in the following situations:
88
Driving Controls
▷ After the engine is switched off when the 2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to briefly push the selector lever in the de‐
page 79, or when the ignition is switched sired direction, past a resistance point, if
off, refer to page 79, and when selector needed. The selector lever automatically
lever position R or D is set. returns to the center position when re‐
▷ If, with the vehicle stationary and the selec‐ leased.
tor lever in position D or R, the driver's
safety belt unbuckled, the driver's door is
opened, and the brake pedal is not de‐
pressed.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start. Engaging selector lever position P
Only when the engine is running and the brake
pedal is depressed is it possible to change
from selector lever position P to another selec‐
tor lever position.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,

R
A selector lever lock prevents the following Press button P.
faulty operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever
Kickdown
position R.
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
performance.
position P into another selector lever posi‐
tion. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re‐
sistance point at the full throttle position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts
up later and the shifting times are shorter.
89
Controls Driving
Activating the sport program Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
To shift down: press the selector lever forward.
To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ speed limits are reached.
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ Steptronic Sport transmission:
ment cluster, for instance S1. prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ manual mode
vated. The Steptronic Sport transmission does not
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
Ending the Sport program
the following conditions is met:
Push the selector lever to the right.
▷ DSC deactivated.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ TRACTION activated.
Manual mode M/S ▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
Concept down.
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual With the respective transmission version, the
mode. lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
Activating manual mode shift paddles. This is not possible by switching
briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever
position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ Concept

tor lever position D, arrow 1. Next, push the se‐ The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
lector lever forward or pull it backward, ar‐ you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
row 2. hands on the steering wheel.
90
Driving Controls
General information Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is dis‐
Shifting
played, for example P.
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
Short-term manual mode

Electronic unlocking of the
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift transmission lock
paddle switches into manual mode tempora‐
rily. General information
After conservative driving in manual mode Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
without acceleration or shifting via the shift maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
paddles for a certain amount of time, the trans‐
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
mission switches back to automatic mode.
engine.
With some transmission versions it is possible
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
to switch into automatic mode as follows:
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. ing away.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. Engaging selector lever position N
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
Continuous manual mode
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift must audibly start.
paddle switches into manual mode perma‐
3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐
nently.
row 1, and press and hold the selector
lever into selector lever position N, ar‐
Shifting row N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.

▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ With the respective transmission version, 4. Release the selector lever.
the lowest possible gear can be selected
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
stops.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
and secure it against moving on its own.
91
Controls Driving
For additional information, see the chapter on Repeated use during a trip
tow-starting and towing. After Launch Control was used, the transmis‐
sion must cool down for approx. 5 minutes, be‐
Steptronic Sport transmission: fore Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, when used again.
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration After using Launch Control
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
rounding conditions.
namic Stability Control again.
General information
System limits
The use of Launch Control causes premature
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
component wear since this function represents
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 196, period.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select Sport+ with

the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
92
Displays Controls
Displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 100 5 Engine oil temperature 100

2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption
3 Messages, for instance Check Control 7 Electronic displays
4 Tachometer 100 8 Reset miles 100
Multifunctional instrument display

Concept
The instrument display is a variable display. In rendition adapts to the respective program
the event of a program change, the display through the Driving Dynamics Control.
93
Controls Displays
General information
The change of the display type can be deacti‐ Some of the displays in the instrument display
vated via iDrive. may differ from the way they are shown in this
Owner's Manual.
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 100 Selection lists 104

2 Messages, for instance Check Control ECO PRO displays 202
3 Speedometer 6 Engine oil temperature 100
4 Variable displays 7 Onboard Computer 105
5 Tachometer 100 8 Reset miles 100
Switching the change of display on 4. "Instrument panel"

and off 5. "ECO PRO info"
You can set whether the instrument display or"Driving mode view"
automatically changes to the ECO PRO or
SPORT in the display when you switch driving With Professional Navigation System:
modes. switching zoom function on/off
About iDrive: The current speed can be shown enlarged in
1. "My Vehicle" the speedometer.
2. "iDrive settings" Using iDrive:
3. "Displays" 1. "My Vehicle"
94
Displays Controls
3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Magnifier function"
Sport displays
1 Speedometer 5 Performance display, if the vehicle is

2 Tachometer 100 equipped accordingly
3 Transmission display 6 Variable displays
4 Shift lights, when respectively equipped
In the Sport and Sport+ programs the instru‐ General information

ment display switches to a sporty view. This Steptronic Sport transmission: shift lights are
view supports a sporty driving style with more shown, when the SPORT+ driving program is
prominent representation of the tachometer, activated. The M manual mode of the trans‐
the transmission displays, and the vehicle mission must be activated too.
speed.
Switching on shift lights
Shift point indicator
Steptronic Sport transmission:
The concept 1. Select SPORT+ using the Driving Dynam‐
The shift point indicator indicates the optimum ics Control.
shift moment in the tachometer. Thus, with a 2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the
sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle transmission.
acceleration is achieved.
95
Controls Displays
Display Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the Red lights

tachometer.
Safety belt reminder
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated
fields indicate an increase in the speed. Safety belt on the driver's side is not
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated buckled. For some country-specific
fields indicate the upcoming shift moment. models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
▷ Arrow 3: fields are illuminated in red. Do seat.
not wait any further to shift.
Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated: safety
When the maximum possible speed is belt on the driver or passenger side is not
reached, the entire display flashes. When the buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be
maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of activated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
fuel is interrupted in order to protect the en‐ senger seat.
gine.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Check Control
Airbag system
Concept Airbag system and belt tensioner are
The Check Control system monitors functions not working.
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
Have the vehicle checked immediately
in the monitored systems.
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
Parking brake
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster Release the parking brake, refer to
and in the Head-up Display. page 83.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
an SMS text message may appear on the Con‐
trol Display.
96
Displays Controls
Approach control warning pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator

pedal.
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a col‐ Yellow lights
lision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is
too small. Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Increase distance. Braking force boost may not be work‐
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐ ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ger braking distance into account.
approaches another vehicle at a relatively high Have the system immediately checked
differential speed. by a dealer’s service center or another
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ qualified service center or repair shop.
neuver.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Person warning The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐
Symbol in the instrument cluster. trols the drive and braking forces. The
If a collision with a person detected in vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
this way is imminent, the symbol lights adapt driving style to the driving circumstan‐
up and a signal sounds. ces.
The indicator light illuminates: DSC has mal‐
Symbol in the instrument display. functioned.
If a collision with a person detected in Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
this way is imminent, the symbol lights center or another qualified service center or re‐
up and a signal sounds. pair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
Orange lights page 142.
Active Cruise Control DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

The number bars shows the selected deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
distance from the vehicle driving Control is activated
ahead. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, tivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
ACC, refer to page 148. trol is activated.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control page 142, and DTC Dynamic Traction Control,
refer to page 143.
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has
been detected ahead of you.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Indicator light flashes: the conditions
are not adequate for the system to work. The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
The system was deactivated but applies the tire inflation pressure in a tire.
brakes until you actively resume control by
97
Controls Displays
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid Emissions are deteriorating. Have
sudden braking and steering maneuvers. the vehicle checked as soon as
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 126. possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
The indicator light illuminates. firing in the engine.
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire. system checked immediately; otherwise,
Observe the information in the Check Control serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
message. riod can seriously damage emission con‐
The indicator light flashes and then illuminates trol components, in particular the catalytic
continuously. converter.
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
be detected. page 240.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ Lane departure warning
ing the area of the interference, the system
System is switched on and under cer‐
automatically becomes active again.
tain circumstances warns if a detected
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. lane is left without flashing beforehand.
Reset the system again.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 137.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service Green lights
center or repair shop as needed.
Turn signal
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified Turn signal switched on.
service center or repair shop. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 121. light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Steering system Turn signal, refer to page 83.
Steering system in some cases not

working. Parking lights, headlight
Have the steering system checked by a Parking lights or headlights are

dealer’s service center or another qualified switched on.
service center or repair shop. Parking lights/low beams, headlight
control, refer to page 111.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up: Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 114.
98
Displays Controls
High-beam Assistant Temporary display

High-beam Assistant is switched on. Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. These
High beams are switched on and off
Check Control messages are stored and can
automatically depending on the traffic
be displayed again later.
situation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 114. Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Cruise control About iDrive:
The system is switched on. It maintains 1. "My Vehicle"
the speed that was set using the con‐
2. "Vehicle status"
trol elements on the steering wheel.
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Blue lights
High beams
Display
High beams are switched on. Check Control

High beams, refer to page 84. At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
Hiding Check Control messages
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
Press and hold button on signal lever. via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
Continuous display automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ Functions
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions Depending on the Check Control message, the
occur at once, the messages are displayed following functions can be selected.
consecutively. ▷ "Owner's Manual"
These messages can be hidden for approx. Display additional information about the
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed Check Control message in the Integrated
again automatically. Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
99
Controls Displays
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐ ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
other qualified service center or repair the temperature range. In addition, a Check
shop. Control message is displayed.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
When the engine oil temperature is too
Contact Roadside Assistance. high, a red indicator light is displayed.
Messages after trip completion

Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched Coolant temperature
off. If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Fuel gauge A red indicator light is displayed.
Depending on the equipment

version, the arrow beside the Check the coolant level.
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on. Odometer and trip odometer
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary. Display
Information on refueling, refer to page 210. ▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Show/reset miles
Tachometer
Press the button.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
▷ When the ignition is
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
switched off, the time, the
protect the engine.
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
Engine oil temperature ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds. External temperature
▷ Normal operating tempera‐ WARNING
ture: the pointer is in the Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
middle or in the left half of there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
the temperature display. or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
100
Displays Controls
accident. Adjust your driving style to the NOTE

weather conditions at low temperatures.◀ With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
If the indicator drops to
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
sounds.
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
A Check Control message is
displayed.
Displaying the cruising range
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
The range can also be displayed as bar in the
instrument cluster.
Using iDrive:
Time
1. "My Vehicle"
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
3. "Displays"
The time can be set on the Con‐
trol Display. 4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Additional indicators"
Date
The date is displayed in the On‐
Current fuel consumption
board Computer.
Instrument cluster
The date and date format can be
set on the Control Display. Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally-
Range friendly manner.
Display
With a low remaining range:
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly. Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
▷ The remaining range is
are currently driving in an effi‐
shown on the Onboard
cient and environmentally-
Computer.
friendly manner.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance
taking curves aggressively, the engine
function is not always ensured. Displaying the current fuel
consumption
The Check Control message appears continu‐ Using iDrive:
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
1. "My Vehicle"
101
Controls Displays
3. "Displays" Using iDrive:

4. "Instrument panel" 1. "My Vehicle"
5. "Additional indicators" 2. "Vehicle status"
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ 3. "Service required"
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
Energy recovery 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐

tion.
Display
Symbols
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy Symbols Description
while the vehicle is coasting.
The vehicle battery is partially No service is currently re‐
charged and fuel consumption quired.
can be reduced.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
Service requirements ing.
Concept The service deadline has al‐

ready passed.
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
Entering appointment dates
General information
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
spections.
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
nance. set correctly.
A service advisor can read out the current Via iDrive:

service requirements from your remote con‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
trol.
2. "Vehicle status"
Display 3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
Detailed information on service 5. "Date:"
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ 7. Confirm.
play. The entered date is stored.
102
Displays Controls
Automatic Service Request Speed Limit Info

Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ Speed Limit Info
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐
ter before a service due date. Concept
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐ Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
ter was notified. permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
About iDrive:
General information
1. "My Vehicle"
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
2. "Vehicle status" detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
3. "Teleservice Call" well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc., are also detected and compared
Gear shift indicator with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐
Concept ing on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
count the information stored in the navigation
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
system and also displays speed limits present
cient gear for the current driving situation.
on routes without signs.
General information
Safety information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try-specific version, the gear shift indicator is WARNING
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic The system does not release from the
transmission and with manual transmission. personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐ bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
played in the instrument cluster. accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description Overview

Fuel efficient gear is set. Camera
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
103
Controls Displays
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ ▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
ror clean and clear. reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
Switching on/off mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
Using iDrive:
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
1. "My Vehicle" camera.
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
3. "Displays" system are incorrect.
4. "Instrument panel" ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
5. "Speed limit information" tem.
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐ ▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
played on the Info Display in the instrument such as due to changes in road routing.
cluster via the Onboard Computer. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
Display ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
The following is displayed in the instrument ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
cluster: ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
Speed Limit Info
are detected.
Current speed limit.
Selection lists
General information
Speed Limit Info not available. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display:
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the ▷ Current audio source.
Head-up Display.
▷ Redial phone feature.
System limits ▷ Turn on voice activation system.
The system may not be fully functional and It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ namics Control.
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
104
Displays Controls
Activating a list and adjusting the Calling up information on the Info

setting Display
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn Press and hold button on signal lever.
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding Information is displayed in the Info Display of
list. the instrument cluster.
1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting. Information at a glance
2. Press the thumbwheel. Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
Display the Info Display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of
arrival.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features, When destination guidance is activated in
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the navigation system.
the illustration shown.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance
to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
Onboard Computer the navigation system.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐ Selecting information
hicle data in the instrument cluster, such as
You can select what information from the On‐
average values.
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
105
Controls Displays
Using iDrive: Resetting average values

1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired information.
Indication in the Info Display

The information from the On‐
board Computer is shown in the Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Info Display in the instrument
cluster. Distance to destination
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
tance remaining to the destination is displayed
Information in detail
if a destination is entered in the navigation sys‐
tem before the trip is started.
Range
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
Displays the estimated cruising range available
tomatically.
with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driving Time of arrival
style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
If there is only enough fuel left for less than
ment, the estimated time of ar‐
45 miles/80 km, the color of the display
rival is displayed if a destination
changes.
is entered in the navigation sys‐
tem before the trip is started.
Average fuel consumption
The time must be correctly set.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for Speed Limit Info
the distance traveled since the last reset by the Further information, see chapter Speed Limit
Onboard Computer. Info.
Average speed Onboard Computer on the Control

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the Display
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed. Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐
age values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are availa‐
ble on the Control Display:
106
Displays Controls
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as Displaying sport displays

the fuel consumption, are displayed. The Using iDrive:
values can be reset individually.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a certain distance and can be 2. "Technology in action"
reset as often as necessary. 3. "Sport displays"
Calling up the Onboard Computer or

trip computer Speed warning
Using iDrive:
Concept
1. "My Vehicle"
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
2. "Driving information"
cause a warning to be issued.
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
General information
Resetting the Onboard Computer The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
Using iDrive: drops below the set speed limit once by at
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information" Displaying, setting or changing the
3. "Onboard info" speed warning
4. "Consumption" or "Speed" Using iDrive:
Resetting the trip computer
3. "Speed warning"
Using iDrive:
4. "Warning at:"
1. "My Vehicle"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
2. "Driving information" is displayed.
3. "Trip computer" 6. Press the Controller.
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset. Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle About iDrive:
has come to a standstill. 1. "My Vehicle"
Sport displays 3. "Speed warning"

4. "Speed warning"
General information 5. Press the Controller.
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
107
Controls Displays
Setting your current speed as the ▷ Speed.

speed warning ▷ Navigation system.
Using iDrive: ▷ Check Control messages.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ Driver assistance systems.
3. "Speed warning" Some of this information is only displayed
4. "Select current speed" briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
About iDrive:
Head-up Display
1. "My Vehicle"
Concept 2. "iDrive settings"
This system projects important information
3. "Displays"
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
4. "Head-Up Display"
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road. 5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Overview Display.
used.
Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Switching on/off 2. "iDrive settings"
1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Displays"
2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displays" 5. "Brightness"
4. "Head-Up Display" 6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
5. "Head-Up Display" ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
Display
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
Overview
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
rently used.
108
Displays Controls
Adjusting the height ▷ Unfavorable light conditions.

Using iDrive: If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
1. "My Vehicle"
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
3. "Displays" up Display, refer to page 255.
5. "Height" Special windshield
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height The windshield is part of the system.
is reached. The shape of the windshield makes it possible
7. Press the Controller. to display a precise image.
Settings are stored for the profile currently A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
used. ages from being displayed.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
stored using the memory function, refer to have the special windshield replaced by a deal‐
page 71. er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop, if necessary.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Vehicle status
About iDrive: General information
1. "My Vehicle" The status can be displayed and actions per‐
2. "iDrive settings" formed for several systems.
3. "Displays"
Opening the vehicle status
Using iDrive:
5. "Rotation"
1. "My Vehicle"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is selected. 2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
used.
Tire Monitor, refer to page 126.
Display visibility ▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 122.
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors: ▷ Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer
to page 122.
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
oil level check, refer to page 233.
play.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
sages are stored in the background and
▷ Wet roads. can be displayed on the Control Display.
109
Controls Displays
Displaying stored Check Control mes‐

sages, refer to page 99.
▷ "Service required": Displaying serv‐
ice requirements, refer to page 102.
▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
110
Lights Controls
Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function
This chapter describes all standard, country- Low beams
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Instrument lighting
must be observed. Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
Overview
General information
Switches in the vehicle
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is automat‐
ically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
The light switch element is located next to the riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
steering wheel. and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
Symbol Function Canada: when parking, switch on the one-
sided roadside parking light, refer to
Front fog lights
page 111.
Automatic headlight control

Low beams
Position of switch:
Adaptive Light Control
The low beams light up when the ignition is
Lights off switched on.
Daytime running lights
Canada: roadside parking light
Parking lights
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
111
Controls Lights
Switching on Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay illuminated for a particular
time if the high beams are switched on after
radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration

Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point.
3. "Lighting"
Switching off
Press the lever back into the standard position. 5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
Welcome lamps and rently used.
headlamp courtesy delay
feature
Automatic headlight control
Welcome lamps
Concept
General information The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ambient brightness, individual light functions ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is there is precipitation.
unlocked.
General information
Activating/deactivating A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
Position of switch: , cause the lights to be switched on.
Using iDrive: When emerging from a tunnel during the day,

the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
1. "My Vehicle" ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
2. "Vehicle settings" The low beams always stay on when the fog
3. "Lighting" light is switched on.
Activating
5. "Welcome lights"
Position of switch:
rently used. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low beams are switched
on.
112
Lights Controls
System limits General information

The automatic headlight control cannot serve Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
as a substitute for your personal judgment of rameters, the light from the headlight follows
lighting conditions. the course of the road.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
der these conditions, you should always switch er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
on the lights manually. Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
tive Light Control consists of one or several
systems:
Daytime running lights ▷ Cornering light, refer to page 113.
General information Activating

Position of switch: , ,
Position of switch:
The daytime running lights light up when the
Adaptive Headlight Control is active when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
engine is running.
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Cornering light
Activating/deactivating In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
In some countries, daytime running lights are
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
the curve better when the vehicle is moving
vate the daytime running lights.
below a certain speed.
Using iDrive:
The cornering light is automatically switched
1. "My Vehicle" on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
3. "Lighting"
may be automatically switched on regardless
4. "Exterior lighting" of the steering angle.
used. Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
Adaptive Light Control sates for acceleration and braking operations
in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
Concept
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
113
Controls Lights
High-beam Assistant The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when

manually switching the high beams on and off,
Concept refer to page 84.
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
participants early on and automatically the button on the turn signal lever.
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
General information substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high when to use the high beams. In situation that
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic require this, therefore switch off manually.
situation allows. In the low speed range, the The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
high beams are not switched on by the system. ing situations, and driver intervention may be
The system responds to light from oncoming necessary:
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
adequate illumination, for instance in towns such as fog or heavy precipitation.
and cities. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
The high beams can be switched on and off at as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
any time as usual. and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
Activating/deactivating ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle Fog lights

equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever. Front fog lights
The indicator light in the instrument Concept

cluster is illuminated when the low The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams are switched on. beams to illuminate a wider area of the road‐
way.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
Functional requirement
The blue indicator light in the instru‐ The low beams must be switched on before
ment cluster lights up when the system switching on the front fog lights.
switches on the high beams.
114
Lights Controls
Switching on/off Overview

Press button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to

page 112, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched 1 Interior lights
on. 2 Reading lights
Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights on/off

Press button.
The parking lights or low beams must be To switch off permanently: press the button
switched on to adjust the brightness. and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Settings Switching the reading lights on/off

Adjust the brightness with the Press button.
thumbwheel.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
reading lights are located next to the interior
lights in the front and rear.
Ambient light
Interior lights
General information
General information Depending on the equipment version, lighting
Depending on the equipment, the interior can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐ terior.
tesy lamps are controlled automatically.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ Selecting color scheme
trols brightness of some of these features. Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
115
Controls Lights
With a color scheme selected and welcome

lights activated they light up in the line's color
when vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the brightness
of the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
116
Safety Controls
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 3 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Knee airbag
Front airbags Knee airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐ impact.
pacts in which safety belts alone would not
provide adequate protection. Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
Side airbag tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the collisions.
side of the body in the chest, lap, and head
area.
117
Controls Safety
Information on optimum effect of the ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as

airbags jackets, over the backrests.
WARNING ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
the dashboard, and the seats.
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and may cause additional injuries due ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ Even when you follow all instructions very
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving closely, injury from contact with the airbags
the optimum protective effect of the airbag cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
system.◀ The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; therefore,
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
contact BMW Customer Relations or your au‐
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
thorized BMW service center.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as Warnings and information on the airbags are
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ also found on the sun visors.
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
Functional readiness of the airbag
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
system
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
Safety information
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐ WARNING
imals or objects between an airbag and a Individual components can be hot after
person. triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or nents.◀
modify them in any way.
WARNING
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
Improperly executed work can lead to
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on spective accident severity. There is a risk of
the front passenger side as a storage area. injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
other objects on the front passenger seat ped by a dealer’s service center or another
that are not specifically suited for seats qualified service center or repair shop.◀
with integrated side airbags.
118
Safety Controls
Correct function Malfunction of the automatic

When the ignition is switched on, the
deactivation system
warning lamp in the instrument cluster When transporting older children and adults,
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
the operational readiness of the entire airbag tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
system and the belt tensioner. the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
Airbag system malfunctioning
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the and the indicator lamp goes out.
ignition is turned on.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat cushion
seat passenger airbags
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
Concept or other items to the front passenger seat
The system reads if the front passenger seat is unless they are specifically determined to
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ be safe for use on the front passenger
sistance. seat.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ passenger seat if a child restraint system is
vated. to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
General information could press against the seat from below.
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger Indicator lamp for the front-seat
seat, see Children. passenger airbags
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
floor area.◀ ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
119
Controls Safety
▷ The indicator lamp lights up A corresponding message appears on the

when a child is properly Control Display.
seated in a child restraint fix‐
1. Press the switch and move the respective
ing system or when the seat
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not 2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
activated. still moves forward slightly.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient The calibration procedure is completed when
size is detected on the seat. The airbags the message on the Control Display disap‐
on the front passenger side are activated. pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
Detected child restraint systems peat the calibration.
The system generally detects children seated If the message does not disappear after a re‐
in a child restraint system, particularly in child peat calibration, have the system checked as
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the soon as possible.
point in time when the vehicle was manufac‐
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up. This indi‐
Rollover protection system
cates that the child restraint system has been
The concept
detected and the front-seat passenger airbags
are not activated. The rollover protection system is automatically
activated in the event of a sufficiently serious
Strength of the driver's and front-seat accident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted ex‐
passenger airbag cessively. The safety frames located behind
the rear headrests extend within fractions of a
The explosive power that activates driver's/
second.
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
pends on the positions of the driver's/front Supplementing the reinforced front windshield
passenger seat. frame, the rollover protection system further
increases passenger safety.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
General information
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display. Do not place any objects on the covers of the
rollover protection system.
Calibrating the front seats
Safety information
WARNING
WARNING
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of There can be damage or injuries when
property damage. Make sure that the area of the rollover protection system is triggered.
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
justment.◀ age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the rollover protection system is clear.◀
120
Safety Controls
WARNING to close the hardtop. The protective function of

Improperly executed work can lead to the system is then restored.
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering 1. Pull the release lever in the safety frame up
of the system. In the case of a malfunction, the and hold it, arrow 1.
system could not trigger as intended in the
event of an accident despite respective acci‐
dent severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Have the system checked, repaired,
dismantled and scrapped by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
WARNING
After triggering or damage, system func‐
tionality is limited or not available anymore. 2. Push the safety frame down, arrow 2.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. 3. Release the release lever only if the safety
Have the system checked and replaced by a frame was pushed back almost completely.
dealer’s service center or another qualified 4. Push the safety frame down until it notice‐
service center or repair shop in the event of ably engages. To do this, the safety frame
triggering of or damage to the system.◀ must be pressed far into its holder; high
WARNING levels of force are required.
With an extended rollover protection sys‐ WARNING

tem, the area of movement of the hardtop is If the safety frame is not engaged
limited. There is risk of injuries or risk of prop‐ correctly, it can extend jerkily. There is risk
erty damage. When the rollover protection sys‐ of injuries. When pressing down the trig‐
tem is extended, do not move the hardtop.◀ gered rollover protection system, do not
bend over the safety frame.◀
Overview Slowly reduce pressure on the safety
frame in order to test whether it is latched.
5. Proceed likewise with the second safety
frame.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed
when there is a malfunction.
Covers of the rollover protection system

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Triggered rollover protection system
Concept
If the rollover protection system was not
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
placed under any stress after an automatic
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
triggering, it can be pushed back by hand, e.g.,
121
Controls Safety
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one One to four yellow wheels

or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
and tire temperature.
Gray wheels
General information
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
With use of the system observe further infor‐ losses.
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
Possible causes:
fer to page 214.
▷ Malfunction.
Functional requirements ▷ The system is being reset.
The system must have been reset at the cor‐
rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable Additonal information
signaling of a loss of tire inflation pressure is The status control display additionally shows
not assured. the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
Reset the system after each adjustment of the pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or shows the actual values read; they may vary
wheel change. depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Resetting the system
Status display
General information
The system status can be displayed on the
A reset must be performed in the following sit‐
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys‐
uations:
tem is active.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
Using iDrive:
adjusted.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Reset
The current status is displayed. Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Tire conditions
2. "Vehicle status"
General information 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
Tire and system status are indicated by the 4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
color of the wheels and a SMS text message 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
on the Control Display. reset".
6. Drive away.
All wheels green
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
System is active and will issue a warning re‐ tus is displayed.
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored dur‐
ing the last reset. After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
122
Safety Controls
accepted as reference values. The reset is Symbol Possible cause

completed automatically while driving.
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
After a successfully completed reset, the
ing to specifications.
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See The tire inflation pressure has fallen
label for recommended pressures." is dis‐ below the level of the last reset.
played.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically. Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
Messages needed.
2. Reset the system.
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the If the tire inflation pressure is too low
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched
on. Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
Safety information
the instrument cluster.
WARNING
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
message appears on the Control Display.
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run- Symbol Possible cause
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if There is a tire inflation pressure
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐ loss.
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀ No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
If a tire inflation pressure check is stored during the last reset.
required
Message Measure
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ 1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
pears on the Control Display. Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
Symbol Possible cause
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
The system has detected a wheel station, check and correct the tire inflation
change, but no reset was done. pressure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
123
Controls Safety
If there is a significant loss of tire center or another qualified service center

inflation pressure or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
Message repair kit or by changing the tire.
A yellow warning light is illuminated in Use of sealant, for instance from the tire repair
the instrument cluster. kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked and re‐
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐ placed at the next opportunity.
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display. Run-flat tires
Safety information
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
WARNING
tire inflation pressure.
Your vehicle handles differently with a
No reset was performed for the sys‐ run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
tem. The system issues a warning stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
based on the tire inflation pressures duced, braking distances are longer and the
stored during the last reset. self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Measure Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.◀
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers. Maximum speed
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with You may continue driving with a damaged tire
normal tires or run-flat tires. at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 222, are la‐

Continued driving with a flat tire
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

Actions in the event of a flat tire vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Normal tires
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
1. Identify the damaged tire.
the next opportunity.
Check the air pressure in all four tires, for
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
instance using the tire pressure gage of a
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
tire repair kit.
not have been reset. In this case, perform
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires the reset.
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. In this case, perform Possible driving range with a
the reset. depressurized tire
If identification of flat tire damage is not The possible driving range varies depending
possible, please contact a dealer’s service on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
124
Safety Controls
speed, road conditions, external temperature. Malfunction

The driving range may be less but may also be
The yellow warning light flashes and is
more if an economical driving style is used.
then illuminated continuously. A Check
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight Control message is displayed. No flat
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐ tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km. tected.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle ing situations:
differently, potentially leading to conditions ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
such as the following: mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a
▷ Changed self-steering properties. dealer’s service center or another qualified
Adjust driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ service center or repair shop.
neuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
curbs, potholes, etc. Reset the system again.
Final tire failure ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices

with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ ing the area of the interference, the system
cate the final failure of a tire. automatically becomes active again.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐ Declaration according to NHTSA/
dent. FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s System
service center or another qualified service cen‐ Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
ter or repair shop. should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
System limits by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
The system does not function properly if a re‐ placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
set has not been carried out, for instance a flat vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
tire is reported though tire inflation pressures indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
are correct. pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
temperature falls again. These circumstances
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
should stop and check your tires as soon as
very sharply.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
The system cannot indicate sudden serious sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire damage caused by external circumstances. tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
125
Controls Safety
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ Functional requirements

ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the The system must have been initialized when
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's sured:
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐
even if under-inflation has not reached the
ization was performed with the correct tire
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
inflation pressure.
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ justed to a new value, an initialization was
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ performed.
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ Status display
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one The current status of the flat tire monitor can
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ be displayed, for example, whether the RPA is
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ active.
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ About iDrive:
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to 1. "My Vehicle"
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 2. "Vehicle status"
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle The status is displayed.
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ Initialization required
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels An initialization must be performed in the fol‐
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement lowing situations:
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
to continue to function properly. adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor Performing initialization

Concept When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
tween the individual wheels while driving.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
snow chains.
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐ Using iDrive:
ence will be detected and reported as a flat 1. "My Vehicle"
tire.
2. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tion pressure in the tires.
126
Safety Controls
4. Start the engine but do not drive off. Run-flat tires, refer to page 222, are la‐
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving, System limits
which can be interrupted at any time.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
The initialization automatically continues when the following situations:
driving resumes.
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss
in all four tires will not be recognized.
Messages Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure
regularly.
General information
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
in advance.
Safety information ▷ When the system has not been initialized.

▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
WARNING
surface.
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is ▷ When driving with snow chains.
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐ Actions in the event of a flat tire
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀ Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Indication of a flat tire Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.,
A yellow warning light is illuminated in using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
the instrument cluster. kit.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
message appears on the Control Display. have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
There is a flat tire or a major loss in possible, please contact a dealer’s service
tire inflation pressure. center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a tire repair kit
Measure
or by changing the tire.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
127
Controls Safety
Run-flat tires Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
Safety information differently, potentially leading to conditions
WARNING such as the following:
Your vehicle handles differently with a ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐ ▷ Longer braking distances.
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐ ▷ Changed self-steering properties.
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a Adjust driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
risk of an accident. neuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs, potholes, etc.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀ Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
Maximum speed cate the final failure of a tire.
You may continue driving with a damaged tire Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: service center or another qualified service cen‐
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ ter or repair shop.
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
Intelligent Safety
the next opportunity.
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
the driver assistance system.
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
Possible driving range with a tems that can help prevent an imminent colli‐
depressurized tire sion. These systems are active automatically
every time the engine is started using the
The possible driving range varies depending
Start/Stop button:
on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature. ▷ Approach control warning, refer to
The driving range may be less but may also be page 129.
more if an economical driving style is used. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 135.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐ Safety information
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km. WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
128
Safety Controls
tem may not be output or they may be output Switching on/off

too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐ The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic cally active after every departure.
intervene in the respective situations.◀ Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
WARNING Press button: the systems are turned on. The
Due to system limits, individual functions LED lights up.
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, Settings can be made on the Control Display.
for instance approach control warning with
braking function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to Approach control warning
tow-starting/towing.◀
Depending on the equipment, the collision
warning system consists of one of the two sys‐
Overview tems:
▷ Approach control warning with City light
Button in the vehicle braking function, refer to page 129.
▷ Approach control warning with braking
function, refer to page 132
Front-end collision warning

with City Braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
Intelligent Safety button accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
Camera
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. intentionally, the approach control warning and
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
ror clean and clear. tem reactions.
129
Controls Safety
General information Overview

The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx. Button in the vehicle
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
Objects that the system can detect are taken

into account.
Safety information
WARNING
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
ror clean and clear.
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
WARNING
The system is automatically active after every
Due to system limits, individual functions driving off.
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, Switching off
for instance approach control warning with
braking function. There is a risk of an accident. Press button: the system is switched
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to off. The LED goes out.
tow-starting/towing.◀ Re-press button: the system is switched on.
The LED lights up.
130
Safety Controls
Setting the warning time assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐

The warning time can be set. vention in a possible risk of collision.
Using iDrive: Acute warnings can also be triggered without

previous forewarning.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings" Braking intervention
3. "Intelligent Safety" The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
4. "Warning time" to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
5. Select the desired setting. booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐ on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
file currently used. some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
Warning with braking function come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
Display hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
A warning symbol appears in the instrument stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision bility Control.
with a detected vehicle is imminent. The braking intervention can be interrupted by
Symbol Measure stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Object detection can be restricted. Observe
Brake and increase distance. the limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
System limits
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐ Safety information
ver.
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
Prewarning
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
impending danger of a collision or the distance the information regarding the system limits
to the vehicle ahead is too small. and actively intervene, if needed.◀
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning. Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Acute warning with braking function
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
might come late.
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
speed. tected:
The driver must intervene actively when there ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is them at high speed.
131
Controls Safety
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. ently, if needed.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. The automatic braking intervention is executed

with limited braking force and for a brief period
Functional limitations only.
The system may not be fully functional in the If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
following situations: Control with Stop&Go, the approach control
warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
dar sensor.
fall.
The approach control warning is available even
▷ In tight curves.
if cruise control has been deactivated.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
intentionally, the approach control warning and
OFF.
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment tem reactions.
version, the field of view of the camera in
the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐ General information
scured.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ possible danger of collision with vehicles at
gine via the Start/Stop button. speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
ately after vehicle delivery. uation.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from Detection range
the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
such as the warning time, the more warnings
are displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of false warnings.
Collision warning with Objects that the system can detect are taken
braking function into account.
Concept Safety information

The system can help prevent accidents. If an
WARNING
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed. Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
tem may not be output or they may be output
132
Safety Controls
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐ Switching on/off

cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively Switching on automatically
intervene in the respective situations.◀ The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions Switching off
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, Press button: the system is switched
for instance approach control warning with off. The LED goes out.
braking function. There is a risk of an accident. Re-press button: the system is switched on.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to The LED lights up.
Setting the warning time
Overview The warning time can be set.
Button in the vehicle Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Intelligent Safety button Warning with braking function
Display
Radar sensor A warning symbol appears in the instrument
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the with a detected vehicle is imminent.
vehicle. Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.

Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic

signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐

structed.
133
Controls Safety
Prewarning System limits

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance Safety information
to the vehicle ahead is too small. WARNING
The driver must intervene actively when there The system can react incorrectly or not
is a prewarning. at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
Acute warning with braking function the information regarding the system limits
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐ and actively intervene, if needed.◀
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential Detection range
speed.
The system's detection potential is limited.
The driver must intervene actively when there
Thus a system reaction might not come or
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
might come late.
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning. ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
Braking intervention ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
The detection of objects can be influenced by you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
technical system limitations, e.g. pedestrians ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
or stationary objects. Limitations of the detec‐ ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
tion range and functional restrictions are to be
▷ Pedestrians.
considered.
▷ Stationary objects.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
Functional limitations
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on The system may not be fully functional in the
the brake pedal. The system can assist with following situations:
automatic braking intervention if there is risk of ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐ fall.
cle to a complete stop. ▷ In tight curves.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ OFF.
trol.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
Warning sensitivity
No automatic delay occurs.
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
The braking intervention can be interrupted by e.g., the warning time, the more warnings are
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
tively moving the steering wheel. cess of false warnings.
134
Safety Controls
Person warning with City the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
light braking function
The concept Safety information
The system can help prevent accidents with WARNING
pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking tem may not be output or they may be output
function. too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
controls the system. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
General information
WARNING
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐ Due to system limits, individual functions
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐ can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
before a collision. for instance approach control warning with
braking function. There is a risk of an accident.
The system reacts to people who are within Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
the detection range of the system. tow-starting/towing.◀
Detection range
Overview
Button in the vehicle
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐

ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
Intelligent Safety button
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
135
Controls Safety
Camera Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
bility Control.
ror clean and clear.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
Switching on/off tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Observe
the limitations of the detection range and func‐
The system is automatically active after every tional restrictions.
driving off.
System limits
Switching off
Press button: the systems are Safety information
switched off. The LED goes out. WARNING
Press button: the systems are switched on. The system can react incorrectly or not
The LED lights up. at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
Warning with braking function the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way Detection range
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. ited.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
nal sounds. sued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
With instrument display: the red sym‐ tected:
bol is displayed and a signal sounds.
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
evasive maneuver. because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
136
Safety Controls
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than Safety information

32 in/80 cm.
WARNING
Functional limitations The system does not release the driver

from the personal responsibility to correctly
The system may not be fully functional or may
assess route and traffic situation. There is a
not be available in the following situations:
risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and
fall. actively intervene in the respective situations.
▷ In tight curves. In the event of a warning, do not unnecessarily
▷ If the driving stability control systems are jerk the steering wheel.◀
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the Overview
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning

Lane departure warning
The concept Camera
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
uation. ror clean and clear.
The system does not provide a warning if the

turn signal is set before leaving the lane. Switching on/off
Press button.
137
Controls Safety
▷ On: the LED lights up. the information regarding the system limits
▷ Off: the LED goes out. and actively intervene, if needed.◀

rently used. Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
Display in the instrument cluster following situations:
▷ Lines: system is activated. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
was detected and warnings can be ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
issued. markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
Display in the instrument display
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ Symbol orange: system is acti‐
vated. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ Green symbol: at least one lane
marking was detected and warn‐ ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
ings can be issued. front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
Issued warning ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
stickers, etc.
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning Active Blind Spot Detection

The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
The concept
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
138
Safety Controls
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ Radar sensors

cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes
and the steering wheel vibrates.
The radar sensors are located in the rear
Safety information bumper.
WARNING
The system does not release from the Switching on/off
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐ Press button.
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
▷ On: the LED lights up.
intervene in the respective situations.◀ ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Overview rently used.
Button in the vehicle Display
Lamp in the exterior mirror housing
Active Blind Spot Detection
Prewarning
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐
ing indicates when there are vehicles in the
blind spot or approaching from behind.
Acute warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
139
Controls Safety
and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing General information

flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
Brief flashing
A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐
locking serves as system self-test.
System limits ▷ During normal brake application, the bot‐

tom brake lights light up.
Safety information
▷ During heavy brake application, the top
WARNING brake lights additionally light up.
the information regarding the system limits
Attentiveness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
Functional limitations fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
The system may not be fully functional in the trips, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is
following situations: recommended that the driver takes a break.
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own. Safety information
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. WARNING
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. The system does not release from the
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered personal responsibility to correctly assess
with stickers. one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not
▷ If cargo protrudes.
be detected in time. There is a risk of an acci‐
A Check Control message is displayed when dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
the system is not fully functional. alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions.◀
Brake force display Function

Concept The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
Additional brake lamps indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce After travel has begun, the system monitors
the risk of a rear-end collision. certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
140
Safety Controls
This procedure takes the following criteria into

account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, e.g., and will either output an incor‐
rect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, e.g., in the case of a break
during longer trips on highways.
141
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability
This chapter describes all standard, country- Control
series. It also describes features that are not The concept
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Within the physical limits, the system helps to
to the selected options or country versions. keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
This also applies to safety-related functions ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
and systems. When using these functions and the individual wheels.
must be observed. General information
Dynamic Stability Control detects, e.g., the fol‐
lowing unstable driving conditions:
Anti-lock Braking System ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
ABS ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during can lead to understeering.
braking. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
The vehicle maintains its steering power even page 143, is a version of the DSC where for‐
during full brake applications, thus increasing ward momentum is optimized.
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ Safety information
gine. WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
Brake assistant traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
automatically produces the greatest possible situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided spective situations.◀
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
142
Driving stability control systems Controls
Overview DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go

out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction

DSC OFF button Control
Concept
Indicator/warning lights DTC is a version of the DSC where forward
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ momentum is optimized.
trols the drive and braking forces. The system ensures maximum headway on
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
malfunctioned. for instance unplowed snowy roads, but with
somewhat limited driving stability.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
General information acceleration and when driving in curves.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is Drive carefully.
reduced during acceleration and when driving You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
in curves. under the following special circumstances:
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
again as soon as possible. snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
Deactivating DSC driving off from loose ground.
Press and hold this button but not lon‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains.
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. Traction Control
DSC is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equip‐ Activating DTC
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
Activating DSC ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC
OFF lights up.
Press button.
143
Deactivating DTC Variable sport steering

Press button again. The support offered by the variable sport
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ steering changes according to the angle by
tor light go out. which the steering wheel has been turned and
the speed.
So, for instance the steering angle of the front
xDrive wheels is made larger when parking or taking
tight corners. This makes it easier to drive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ around bends.
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
Furthermore, the system provides the steering
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
with more support at low speeds than at higher
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
and makes steering more direct when driving
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
at faster speeds.
road surface.
By taking the angle by which the steering
wheel has been turned and the speed into ac‐
count, a sporty steering response adapted to
Dynamic Damping Control the particular driving situation can be achieved.
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
Driving Dynamics Control
eling on uneven road surfaces.
Concept
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
ing comfort depending on the road surface
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
condition and driving style.
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
Programs OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
The system offers several different programs. program.
The programs can be selected via Driving Dy‐
namics Control. Overview
SPORT Button in the vehicle

Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle.
144
Operating the programs The driver handles several of the stabilization

tasks.
Button Program
Activating SPORT+
DSC OFF
Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
TRACTION
appears in the instrument cluster and
SPORT+ the DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
SPORT
COMFORT Automatic program change
ECO PRO When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Automatic program change

Indicator/warning lights
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
SPORT
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
Concept
Depending on the equipment, consistently
DSC OFF
sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and
When DSC OFF, refer to page 143, is active, drivetrain for greater driving agility with maxi‐
driving stability is limited during acceleration mum driving stabilization.
and when driving in curves.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
TRACTION
the driver profile currently in use.
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Activating SPORT
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 143, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐ Press button repeatedly until SPORT
celeration and when driving in curves. is displayed in the instrument cluster.
SPORT+ Configuring SPORT

Using iDrive:
Concept
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
pension and adjusted drivetrain with limited 2. "Vehicle settings"
driving stabilization. 3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure SPORT"
General information
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. 5. Select the desired setting.
145
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used. rently used.
COMFORT Configuring driving program

Settings can be made for the following driving
Concept programs in Driving mode:
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving ▷ SPORT, refer to page 145.
stabilization.
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 203.
Activating COMFORT
Displays
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument Program selection
cluster.
Pressing the button displays a
In certain situations, the system automatically list of the selectable programs.
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic Depending on your vehicle's op‐
program change, refer to page 145. tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
ECO PRO the illustration shown.
Concept Selected program

ECO PRO provides consistent tuning to mini‐
The instrument cluster displays
mize fuel consumption for maximum range
the selected program.
with maximum driving stabilization.
Comfort functions and the engine Controller
are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Drive-off assistant
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
Concept
PRO is displayed in the instrument This system supports driving off on inclines.
cluster. The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant

Configuring ECO PRO
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
Using iDrive: brake.
1. "My Vehicle" 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
2. "Vehicle settings" out delay.
3. If necessary, "Driving mode" After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
4. "Configure ECO PRO"
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
146
Servotronic
Concept
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
steering function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering more direct when driving
at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel or a comfortable steering response
is conveyed.
147
Controls Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- WARNING

specific and optional features offered with the The system does not release from the
series. It also describes features that are not personal responsibility to correctly assess the
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
to the selected options or country versions. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
This also applies to safety-related functions situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
and systems. When using these functions and the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
systems, the applicable laws and regulations traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
must be observed. spective situations.◀
WARNING
Active Cruise Control with An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
Stop&Go function, ACC cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
Concept
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
against rolling away, observe the following:
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel. ▷ Set the parking brake.
The system maintains the desired speed on ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐ turn the front wheels in the direction of the
celerates or brakes automatically. curb.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
set distance to the vehicle ahead is main‐ chock.◀
tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the WARNING
given situation allows.
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
The distance can be adjusted in several steps. justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐ of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
tive speed. traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the WARNING
given system limits. Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, e.g., in the fol‐
General information lowing situations:
Depending on the driving settings, the features ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
of the cruise control can change in certain vehicle.
areas. ▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
148
Driving comfort Controls
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. Functional requirements

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in Speed range
the respective situations.◀ The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
Overview The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that
Buttons on the steering wheel can be set depends on the vehicle.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
Press but‐ Function tionary.
ton
Cruise control on/off, interrupt, Switching on/off and interrupting

refer to page 149 cruise control
Store, maintain speed, refer to Switching on

page 150
Press button on the steering wheel.
Call up speed, continue cruise
control, refer to page 151 The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
Reduce distance, refer to
to the current speed.
page 150
Cruise control can be used.
Increase distance, refer to
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
page 150
Rocker switch: Switching off

Set speed, refer to page 150 To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Radar sensor Press button on the steering wheel.

A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the ▷ If active: press twice.
vehicle. ▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
If interrupting the system while stationary,

press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ Interrupting automatically

structed.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
149
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. The speed can also be stored by
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ pressing a button.
gaged. Press button.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated. Changing the speed
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driv‐
er's door is opened while the vehicle is
standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a road
with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
▷ If the detection range of the radar is im‐ until the desired speed is set.
paired, for instance by dirt or heavy fog. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
▷ After a stationary period of approx. 3 sec‐ vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
onds when the vehicle has been braked to road is clear.
a stop by the system. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
Setting the speed increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining/storing the speed
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
WARNING
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
speed is maintained and stored as the desired its, braking can be late. There is a risk of acci‐
speed. dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐ the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
to page 151. maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
bly by braking.◀
150
Reduce distance ▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
With instrument display: the symbol is
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ displayed in the speedometer similarly
tance, refer to page 151. to the mark for the desired speed.
Increase distance Brief status display

Press button repeatedly until the de‐ Selected desired speed.
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
tance, refer to page 151. conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Continuing cruise control
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
General information
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
An interrupted cruise control can be continued is shown.
by calling up the stored speed.
Distance display
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before Distance 1
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value Distance 2
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
Distance 3
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed and distance Distance 4

Press button with the system This value is set automatically after
switched on. the system is switched on.
The system has been interrupted or

Displays in the instrument cluster distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
Desired speed and stored speed pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
▷ Marking lights up green: was not detected.
system is active, the mark‐
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
ing indicates the desired
pressed because the accelerator
speed.
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
▷ Marking lights up orange: was detected.
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
151
Detected vehicle System limits

Symbol lights up orange:
Detection range
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven

away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti‐
vate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelera‐
tor pedal, pressing the RES button or rocker
switch.
Indicator/warning lights The detection capacity of the system and the

Symbol flashes orange: automatic braking capacity are limited.
The conditions are not adequate for Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
the system to work. for instance might not be detected.
The system was deactivated but applies the

brakes until you actively resume control by Deceleration
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
pedal. tionary obstacle is located in the same lane,
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
Symbol flashes red and a signal of traffic congestion.
sounds:
The system also does not react in the follow‐
You are requested to intervene by ing situations:
braking or make an evasive maneuver.
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
Displays in the Head-up Display ▷ For red traffic lights.
Some system information can also be dis‐ ▷ Stationary objects.
played in the Head-up Display.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
152
Swerving vehicles Cornering
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
until it is completely within the same lane as speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
your vehicle. not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly into a curve at an appropriate speed.
swerves into your lane, the system may not be The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐ cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
lected distance in certain situations, including detected very late.
if you are driving significantly faster than vehi‐
cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle
driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
needed.
Unexpected lane change
When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating.
After releasing the accelerator pedal the sys‐
tem is reactivated and controls speed inde‐
pendently.
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves

into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐ Driving away
cle, you yourself must react, as the system In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
does not react to stopped vehicles. automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
153
Weather General information

The following restrictions can occur under un‐ Depending on the driving settings, the features
favorable weather or light conditions: of the cruise control can change in certain
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition. areas.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
Safety information
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐ WARNING
ditions: The system does not release from the
▷ Rain. personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
▷ Snowfall. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
▷ Slush. situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
▷ Fog. the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
▷ Glare.
spective situations.◀
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for WARNING
instance by braking, steering or evading. The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
Engine power tions:
The desired speed is also maintained downhill, ▷ On winding roads.
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
▷ In heavy traffic.
engine power is insufficient.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
Malfunction on a loose road surface.
The system cannot be activated if the radar There is a risk of accidents or risk of property
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
caused by damage incurred, e.g., during park‐ stant speed is possible.◀
ing.
WARNING
A Check Control message is displayed if the
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
system fails.
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
Cruise control tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
The concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
154
Overview ▷ When the driver applies the brakes.

▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
Buttons on the steering wheel seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
Button Function
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
Cruise control on/off, interrupting, rent speed.
refer to page 155. ▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
Store speed, refer to page 155.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
trol, refer to page 156. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to
Dynamics Control.
page 155.
Setting the speed
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control Maintaining/storing the speed
Switching on
The marking in the speedometer is set to the

current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐

Switching off
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
▷ If active: press twice. speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
is deleted.
to page 156.
Interrupting manually DSC will be switched on, if needed.

The speed can also be stored by pressing a
When active, press the button on the
button.
steering wheel.
Press button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
155
Changing the speed In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed

The stored speed is reached again and main‐

tained.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
Displays in the instrument cluster
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the Indicator lamp
road is clear. Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
the point of resistance, the desired speed ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
increases or decreases by approx. tem is switched on.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed Desired speed and stored speed
past the point of resistance, the desired
▷ Marking lights up green:
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
system is active, the mark‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
ing indicates the desired
The maximum speed that can be set de‐ speed.
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ system is interrupted, the
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ marking indicates the stored
celerates the vehicle without requiring speed.
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐ is switched off.
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes With instrument display: the symbol is
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. displayed in the speedometer similarly
to the mark for the desired speed.
Continuing cruise control
Brief status display
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued Selected desired speed.
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
speed and stored speed is not too large before conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐ rently fulfilled.
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
156
Displays in the Head-up Display Safety information

Some system information can also be dis‐ WARNING
played in the Head-up Display.
System limits traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
Engine power situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
The desired speed is also maintained downhill, the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
engine power is insufficient. spective situations.◀
WARNING
PDC Park Distance Control Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to
Concept physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury
PDC is a support when parking. When you or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ PDC is not yet active.◀
ble - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones. Overview
▷ Visual display.
With front PDC: button in vehicle
With appropriate equipment: obstacles on the
side of the vehicle that are detected by the
sensors of the parking assistant can also be re‐
ported by the PDC. See side protection, refer
to page 159.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. Park assistance button
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
Ultrasound sensors
ing situations:
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
for instance in the bumpers.
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent. Functional requirements
▷ With parking assistant: by the side sensors Ensure full functionality:
at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
157
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
stickers, bicycle racks. The rearview camera image is displayed if the
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching on/off
WARNING
The system switches on automatically in the Signal tones
following situations: An intermittent tone indicates when the vehi‐
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged cle is approaching an object. E.g., if an object
when the engine is running. is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a sig‐
nal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The rearview camera also switches on.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
▷ If equipped with parking assistant: when
shorter the intervals.
obstacles are detected behind or in front of
the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower If the distance to a detected object is less than
than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
when obstacles are detected. Using iDrive: With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously
located both in front of and behind the vehicle,
1. "My Vehicle" an alternating continuous signal is sounded.
2. "Vehicle settings" The signal tone is switched off, when selector
3. "Parking" lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐ Steptronic transmission.
spective equipment.
Volume
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
The setting is stored for the driver profile entertainment volume can be adjusted.
currently used.
Using iDrive:
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
cle washes, to reduce false alarms. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel 4. "Volume settings"
The system switches off when a certain driving 5. "PDC"

distance or speed is exceeded. 6. Set the desired value.
Switch the system back on, if needed. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
158
Visual warning Display
The approach of the vehicle to an object is To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐ sides.
trol Display before a signal sounds. ▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated. ▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red. ▷ No markings, black area: the area next to
the vehicle was not yet captured.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
2. "Rear view camera"
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
With appropriate protection: side
protection The system does not detect whether an obsta‐
cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,
Concept the markings are shown in black after a certain
time. The area next to the vehicle must be
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
newly captured.
the vehicle.
System limits
General information
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of Safety information
PDC and parking assistant.
WARNING
the information regarding the system limits
159
Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ In large buildings with right angles and

Ultrasonic measurements might not function in smooth walls, for instance in underground
the following situations: garages.
▷ For small children and animals. ▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g., ▷ Due to heavy exhaust.

coats. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ stance sweeping machines, high pressure
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud steam cleaners or neon lights.
machines. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ sound sources is no longer present, the sys‐
aged or out of position. tem is again fully functional.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐
treme heat or strong wind. cle washes, to reduce false alarms.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other

Malfunction
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
▷ With moving objects.
area on the Control Display.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. service center or repair shop.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces. Surround View
▷ If cargo protrudes.
The concept
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
can move into the blind area of the sensors
sistance systems that help the driver when
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
False warnings
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 160.
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐ ▷ Side View, refer to page 163.
stacle within the detection range: ▷ Top View, refer to page 164.
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice. Rearview camera
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
Concept
▷ On rough road surfaces. The rearview camera provides assistance in
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
bumps. behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
160
Safety information Switching on/off

WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
gine is running.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Overview
Switch the system back on, if needed.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
button in the vehicle If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Park assistance button
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
Camera
1. Move the Controller to the left if needed.
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate. ▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
and trailers that are not connected to a
necessary, clean the camera lens.
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
tions.
161
Activating assistance functions Turning radius lines

More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, spa‐ Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
tially shaped markings are displayed. on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Pathway lines Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐

age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements. If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
162
Parking using pathway and turning System limits

radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ Detection of objects
dius lines lead to within the limits of the Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
parking space. objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, certain
assistance functions also take into account
data from the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line. Side View
Concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.
The images from both cameras are shown si‐
Display settings multaneously on the Control Display.
Brightness. Safety information

With the rearview camera switched on: WARNING
1. Move the Controller to the left if needed. The system does not relieve from the
3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller. tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
Contrast. situations.◀
With the rearview camera switched on:

ting is reached, and press the Controller.
163
Overview Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
Button in the vehicle on the Control Display.
Side View Guidelines at the bottom of the image show

the position of the front of the vehicle.
Cameras
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
2. "Brightness"
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐
ture the image. 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
The two camera lenses are located on the 2. "Contrast"
sides of the bumper. 3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If ting is reached, and press the Controller.
required, clean the camera lenses.
System limits
Switching on/off The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
Top View
Concept
travel Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the doors and
the road area around the vehicle are shown on
the Control Display for this purpose.
164
General information Cameras

The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
rearview camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Safety information
Cameras at the bottom in the mirror housings.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
situations.◀
Overview
Rearview camera
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
required, clean the camera lenses.
Switching on/off
The system is automatically switched on if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
The rearview camera image is displayed. To
Park assistance button
switch to the Top View:
1. Move the controller to the left, if needed.

travel
165
Switching on/off manually Contrast.

Press park assistance button. With Top View switched on:
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed. ting is reached, and press the Controller.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the Displaying the turning radius and
park assistance button. pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
Display the space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
Visual warning way.
The approach of the vehicle to an object can ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
be shown on the Control Display. you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
When the distance to an object is small, a red tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in The lane line depends on the engaged
the PDC display. gear and the current steering angle. The
track line is continuously adjusted for the
steering wheel movement.
2. "Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated. ▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
played, it is possible to switch to top view:
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some
2. "Rear view camera" of these situations.
Brightness.
With Top View switched on:

166
Parking assistant traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐

spective situations.◀
Concept
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
Also observe the safety information for PDC

Park Distance Control.
Overview
The system supports parking in the following
situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search. Park assistance button
▷ Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
Ultrasound sensors
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC
Park Distance Control.
Safety information
The four ultrasound sensors for measuring
WARNING parking spaces are located in the front and rear
The system does not release from the on the side of the vehicle.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
167
Functional requirements Switching on and activating
Ultrasound sensors Switching on with the button

Ensure full functionality: Press park assistance button.
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with The LED lights up.
stickers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
For measuring parking spaces Parking assistant is activated automatically.
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. Switching on with reverse gear
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ Shift into reverse.
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Suitable parking space To activate: "Parking Assistant"
General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length Display on the Control Display
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
System activated/deactivated
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Symbol Meaning
Parallel parking to the road:
Gray: the system is not available.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx. White: the system is available but
2.6 ft/0.8 m. not activated.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. The system is activated.
Diagonal parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's Parking space search and system
width plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m. status
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to techni‐
cal limitations, the system is only able to
approximate the depth of diagonal parking
spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released. ▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking
assistant is activated and the parking
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the space search is active.
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set where applicable. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
168
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ cated on the Control Display.
lighted. 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is needed.
clearly detected, the system automatically
adjusts the suitable parking method. In the Interrupting manually
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is time:
displayed. In this case, the desired parking
▷ Press park assistance button.
method must be selected manually.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
tive. Steering control has
on the Control Display.
been taken over by system.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
activated. When the system is deactivated, takes over steering.
the displays on the Control Display are ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
shown in gray. the instruction on the Control Display.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
Parking using the parking assistant 6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
Parking
surfaces.
1. Press park assistance button or shift ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
into reverse gear to switch the parking as‐ overcome, such as curbs.
sistant on, refer to page 168. Activate the ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
parking assistant, if needed. appear.
Parking assistant is activated. ▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed clearances that are too small.
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
The status of the parking space search and ▷ If DSC is being deactivated.
possible parking spaces are displayed on ▷ When switching to another function on the
the Control Display, refer to page 168. Control Display.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ A Check Control message is displayed.
play.
The best possible parking position will Resuming
come after gear change on the stationary An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering tinued, if needed.
wheel move.
169
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to ▷ For small children and animals.
page 168, and follow the instructions on the ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
Control Display. coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
Switching off
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
The system can be switched off as follows: machines.
▷ Press park assistance button. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Switching off the ignition. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
System limits treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
Safety information
vehicles.
WARNING
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
the information regarding the system limits ledges or cargo.
and actively intervene, if needed.◀ ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
No parking assistance such as fences.
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
tance in the following situations: ▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ In tight curves. ▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
▷ When DSC is deactivated. can move into the blind area of the sensors
▷ For diagonal parking spaces. before or after a continuous tone sounds.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
Functional limitations detected or suitable parking spaces may not
The system may not be fully functional in the be detected at all.
Malfunction
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ On slippery ground. The parking assistant failed. Have the system

checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an
edge of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
170
Climate control Controls
Climate control
Vehicle features and options Interior air quality
This chapter describes all standard, country- The air quality inside the vehicle is improved
specific and optional features offered with the by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter,
series. It also describes features that are not and a climate-control system for regulating
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due temperature, air flow, and recirculated-air
to the selected options or country versions. mode.
This also applies to safety-related functions In addition there are other functions which de‐
and systems. When using these functions and pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
systems, the applicable laws and regulations microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic
must be observed. climate control with automatic recirculated-air
control AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 67 6 Temperature

2 Air distribution settings 7 Seat heating, right 67
3 Rear window defroster 8 Air conditioning
4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
171
Controls Climate control
Climate control functions in detail Switching on/off

Press button.
Switching the system on/off
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Switching on
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
Press any button except for the following: side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
▷ Rear window defroster. gine is started.
▷ Seat heating. The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Switching off When using the automatic climate control,
Press the left button for the minimum condensation water, refer to page 198, devel‐
speed. ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
Temperature AUTO program

Concept Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ controlled automatically.
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant. Switching on/off
Settings Press button.

Depending on the selected tempera‐
Turn the ring to set the desired
ture and outside influences, the air is directed
temperature.
to the windshield, side windows, upper body,
and into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 172, is

Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ gram.
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature. Convertible program
When the hardtop is open, the convertible pro‐
Air conditioning gram is activated as well. In the convertible
program, the automatic climate control is opti‐
Concept mized for driving with the hardtop open. In ad‐
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dition, the air flow is increased as the vehicle
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐ speed increases.
ture setting, warmed again. The efficiency of the convertible program can
The car's interior can only be cooled with the be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐
engine running. flector.
172
Recirculated-air mode Controlling the air distribution

manually
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ Concept
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ The air distribution for climate control can be
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The adjusted manually.
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle. Operation
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
Operation
sired program or the desired in‐
Press button repeatedly to select an termediate setting.
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.

▷ Windows.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
▷ Upper body region.
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked. ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain ▷ Floor area.
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions. Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
fogging of the windows increases. dows and remove condensation:
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ ▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if dows.
needed. ▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
Controlling the air flow manually
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Concept
Rear window defroster
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually. Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
Operation off automatically after a certain period of time.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow. Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
duced automatically to save battery power.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 239.
173
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 67 10 Air distribution, right

2 Temperature, left 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
3 AUTO program 12 Air distribution, left
4 Display 13 Rear window defroster
5 Maximum cooling 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
6 Temperature, right clear
7 Seat heating, right 67 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐

sation
8 Air conditioning
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
Climate control functions in detail Switching off

Press the left button for the minimum
Switching the system on/off speed.
Switching on
Press any button except for the following: Temperature
▷ Rear window defroster. Concept
▷ Seat heating. The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
174
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating Maximum cooling

power, and then keeps it constant.
Concept
Settings The system is set to the lowest temperature,
Turn the ring to set the desired optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
temperature.
General information
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the
The automatic climate control reaches this engine running.
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by increasing the cooling or heating output, Switching on/off
and then keeps it constant. Press button.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ gion. The vents need to be open for this.
just the set temperature.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
Air conditioning
AUTO program
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and Concept
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
ture setting, warmed again.
controlled automatically.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running. Switching on/off
Switching on/off Press button.

Depending on the selected tempera‐
Press button.
ture, the intensity of the AUTO program, and
Air conditioning is switched on or off. outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
into the floor area.
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started. The air conditioning, refer to page 175, is
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐ switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
cally with the AUTO program. gram.
When using the automatic climate control, At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
condensation water, refer to page 198, devel‐ trols the program so as to prevent window
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is condensation as much as possible.
normal. In the AUTO program, the air flow may be re‐
duced during a phone call on the hands-free
system.
175
Intensity ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
matic intensity control can be changed. outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
manently blocked.
The selected intensity is shown on the display Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐
of the automatic climate control. cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
Convertible program fogging.
When the hardtop is open, the convertible pro‐ If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
gram is activated as well. In the convertible recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
program, the automatic climate control is opti‐ button to utilize the condensation sensor.
mized for driving with the hardtop open. In ad‐ Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
dition, the air flow is increased as the vehicle
speed increases. Controlling the air flow manually
The efficiency of the convertible program can
be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐ Concept
flector. The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
Concept program first.
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside Operation
air. The outside air supply is shut off and the
interior air is recirculated.
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
General information The selected air flow is shown on the display of
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐ the automatic climate control.
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut- The air flow of the automatic climate control
off automatically. may be reduced automatically to save battery
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐ power.
uously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air Controlling the air distribution
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the manually
fogging of the windows increases.
Concept
Switching on/off The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
176
Operation Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

Press button repeatedly to select a In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
program: crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
▷ Upper body region. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
▷ Upper body region and floor area. nance, refer to page 239.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and floor
Ventilation
area: driver's side only.
Front ventilation
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Defrosting windows and removing

condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
Switching on/off ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
Press button.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
perature in the upper body region, arrow 3.
tem switched on.
Toward blue: colder.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards
the side windows as needed. Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior tem‐
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow perature for the driver and front passenger.
active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
Settings
switch on the air conditioning or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ ▷ Ventilation for cooling:
sor. Direct vent in your direction when car's in‐
terior is too hot.
Rear window defroster ▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Press button. The LED lights up. Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
177
Ventilation in the rear If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the

vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus,
limit the maximum activation time to save
the vehicle battery. The system will be
available again after the engine is started or
after a short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and Switching on/off directly

closing of the vents, arrow 1. Using iDrive:
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
perature, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
Toward red: warmer.
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
This does not change the adjusted interior
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
temperature.
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3. Preselecting the activation time
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Parked-car ventilation
Concept 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's 4. "Comfort ventilation"
interior and lowers its temperature, if needed. 5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on Activating the activation time
and off directly or by using two preset activa‐
Using iDrive:
tion times. The system remains switched on
for 30 minutes. 1. "My Vehicle"
The parked-car ventilation system is operated 2. "Vehicle settings"
via iDrive.
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
Functional requirements 4. "For start time at:"
▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready Activate the desired activation time.

state. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
▷ Direct operation or preset activation time: trol lights up when the activation time is acti‐
does not depend on external temperature. vated.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
178
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐

trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
179
Controls Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
to the selected options or country versions. ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
This also applies to safety-related functions tem to be controlled, the system is
and systems. When using these functions and generally compatible with the integrated Uni‐
systems, the applicable laws and regulations versal Remote Control.
must be observed. If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Universal Integrated Remote
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Control
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Concept Corporation.
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func‐ Control elements on the interior mirror
tions of remote-controlled systems, such as
garage door drives or lighting systems. The
integrated Universal Remote Control replaces
up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
interior mirror must be programmed with the
desired functions. The hand-held transmitter
for the particular system is required in order to
program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
▷ LED, arrow 1.
functions for the sake of security.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
Safety information ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
WARNING
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐ Programming
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of General information
property damage. Make sure that the area of 1. Switch on the ignition.
movement of the respective system is clear 2. Initial setup:
during programming and operation. Also follow
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
180
Interior equipment Controls
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all 2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
programming of the buttons on the interior radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
mirror. nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ 20 seconds.
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system,
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the interior mirror. The required distance the system also have to be synchronized.
depends on the hand-held transmitter. Please read the owner's manual to find out
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button how to synchronize the system.
of the desired function on the hand-held Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
transmitter and the button to be program‐ ond person.
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
Synchronizing the universal remote control
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
with the system:
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system.
rior mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the desired button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at mirror as described.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held on the system being programmed. You
transmitter and repeat the step. Several have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
more attempts at different distances may 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐ interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
tween attempts. and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
Canada: if programming with the hand- step up to three times in order to finish
held transmitter was interrupted, hold synchronization. Once synchronization is
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ complete, the programmed function will be
edly press and release the hand-held carried out.
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. To program other functions on other but‐ Reprogramming individual buttons
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
rior mirror buttons. be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
Special feature of the rolling code flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
wireless system mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
If you are unable to operate the system after prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
repeated programming, please check if the the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
system to be controlled features a rolling code quired distance depends on the hand-held
radio system. transmitter.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
181
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the hold the two outer buttons on the interior mir‐
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ ror simultaneously for approximately 20 sec‐
mitter. onds until the LED on the interior mirror
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ flashes rapidly.
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐ Digital compass
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror. Overview
If the LED does not flash faster after at
most 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the programming starting with
step 4. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held 1 Control button
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
2 Mirror display
Operation
Mirror display
WARNING
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
Operating concept
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of Various functions can be called up by pressing
movement of the respective system is clear the control button with a pointed object, such
during programming and operation. Also follow as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐ The following setting options are displayed in
mitter.◀ succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
The system, such as the garage door, can be
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
is started. To do this, hold down the button ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
within receiving range of the system until the ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
function is activated. The interior mirror LED setting.
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
transmitted.
Setting the compass zones

Deleting stored functions
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and
fer to World map with compass zones.
182
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Make sure that the hardtop is completely
sponds with your location appears in the closed.
mirror.
4. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
pass is ready for use again after approximately on the display. Next, drive in a complete
10 seconds. circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
Calibrating the digital compass cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
The digital compass must be calibrated in the the compass.
event of the following: 5. Open hardtop completely.
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. 6. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
▷ The point of the compass displayed does prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
not change despite changing the direction on the display. Next, drive in a complete
of travel. circle at least once at a speed of no more
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐ than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
played. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
183
Left/right-hand steering Installing

The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language

Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
button again to switch between English "E"
and German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds. The ashtray can be inserted in both cup hold‐
ers.
Sun visor Emptying

Take out the insert.
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up. Cigarette lighter
Vanity mirror WARNING
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ Contact with hot heating elements or the
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
mirror lighting switches on. burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire
Ashtray/cigarette lighter and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its
handle. Make sure that children do not use the
cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀
Ashtray
NOTE
Opening
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Slide the cover forward.
184
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐

tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
The cigarette lighter is located between the or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
cup holders.
Front center console
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Remove the socket or cigarette lighter cover.
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, for instance portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag
or be thrown around in the car's interior when
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that devices and cables are not in the airbag's
area of unfolding.◀
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
185
Rear center console In the center armrest
Remove the cover. A USB interface is located in the center arm‐

rest.
In the cargo area
In the center console
The socket is located on the right side in the

cargo area. A USB interface is located in the center con‐
sole.
USB interface
Loading
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐ The concept
nected to the USB interface. For easier loading, the vehicle is equipped with
a cargo area partition and a Loading aid, refer
General information to page 187. With the loading aid, the folded
Observe the information regarding the con‐ hardtop can be raised out of the cargo area.
nection of mobile devices to the USB interface
in section USB connections, refer to page 35. Safety information
NOTE
pieces of luggage in the side area of the cargo
area can limit the area of movement of the
hardtop and the loading aid. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the move‐
186
ment area of the hardtop and loading aid is Expanding cargo area volume
Opening hardtop or lowering loading

aid
Before opening the hardtop or lowering the
loading aid, push the cargo area partition down
until it latches on both sides. Otherwise, the
hardtop cannot be opened or the loading aid
cannot be lowered.
With the hardtop closed, the cargo area vol‐
ume can be expanded. To do this, push the
cargo area partition upward.
Loading aid
Safety information
WARNING
When the hardtop is open, objects can be When opening and closing the loading
placed below the cargo area partition. Do not aid, body parts can be jammed, for example by
use the areas marked X in the illustration as the mechanism. There is risk of injuries. Make
storage areas. sure that the area of movement of the loading
aid is clear during operation.◀
Closing the hardtop WARNING

With a lifted loading aid, vehicle parts can
protrude and limit the view. There is a danger
of accidents and property damage. Before
driving off, make sure that the loading aid is
completely lowered and the tailgate is
closed.◀
▷ Vehicle at a standstill.
When the hardtop is closed, objects can be ▷ Vehicle is on a level surface.
placed in the area below and next to the cargo
▷ Hardtop fully open.
area partition.
▷ Tailgate fully open.
▷ Cargo area partition latched in the lower
position.
▷ External temperature not below +14 ℉/–
10 ℃.
187
Operation Cargo area

Open tailgate all the way.
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest or removing the
middle section.
General information
The rear seat backrest can be folded down
from the rear.
Press left button: loading aid is
raised.
Safety information
Press right button: loading aid is
lowered. WARNING
The movement is executed at Danger of jamming with folding down the

different speeds depending on the external backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
temperature. property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
The movement stops with the release of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
button.
WARNING
LED in button:
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
▷ Lights up continuously: loading aid in the
load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior,
respective limit position.
e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive
▷ Flashes rapidly: loading aid not in the re‐ maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
spective end position. that the backrest engages into the locking af‐
▷ Flashes slowly: functional requirements ter folding it back.◀
not met.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
After switching off the ignition, the raised load‐ is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
ing aid can be lowered within approx. 10 mi‐ adjustment or improper installation of the child
nutes. After that, the ignition must be switched seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
on for lowering. Make sure that the child restraint system fits
Use the loading aid only for loading and un‐ securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
loading the cargo area. just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
Always move the loading aid into the limit posi‐ and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
tions. seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
Do not park the vehicle with the loading aid
straints or remove them.◀
raised.
The tailgate can only be closed when the load‐
ing aid is fully lowered.
188
NOTE Opening
Vehicle parts can be damaged when
folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk
of property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest

from the rear
Pull on the handle and fold open the anti-theft

protection.
Closing
Fold open the anti-theft protection until it en‐
gages.
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the rear

seat backrest forward, arrow 2.
Fold back the backrest

Return the rear seat backrest to the seating
position and engage it.
Removing the center section
Push the strap, arrow 1, down and remove the

center section, arrow 2.
Anti-theft protection
Concept
The anti-theft protection prevents access to
the cargo area from the car's interior.
189
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 191.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 191.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
to the selected options or country versions. ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
This also applies to safety-related functions console, refer to page 192.
and systems. When using these functions and ▷ Storage compartment between the rear
systems, the applicable laws and regulations seats, refer to page 192.
must be observed.
Glove compartment
Safety information
WARNING Front passenger side
Loose objects or devices with a cable
Safety information
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while WARNING
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐ Folded open, the glove compartment
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices the glove compartment can be thrown into the
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
vehicle's interior.◀ of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
NOTE
close the glove compartment immediately after
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can using it.◀
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Opening
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 190.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 191.
Pull the handle.
▷ Front storage compartment, in front of the
cup holders, refer to page 191. The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
190
Storage compartments Controls
Closing Front storage compartment

Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
There is a storage compartment in the center
Driver's side console.
Safety information
WARNING
Compartments in the doors
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in WARNING
the glove compartment can be thrown into the Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
of an accident or during braking and evasive can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always is a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable
close the glove compartment immediately after objects in the vehicle's interior.◀
using it.◀
Opening Center armrest

Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Fold the center armrest up.
191
Controls Storage compartments
Repositioning Front
The center armrest can be pushed forward or
backward and engages in the end positions.
Connection for an external audio

device
An external audio device, for in‐
stance an MP3 player, can be
connected via the USB audio in‐
terface in the center armrest.
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
To open: slide the cover forward.
Storage compartment in the To close: slide the cover backward.
rear
A storage compartment is located in the center Rear
console.
Storage compartment
between the rear seats
There is a storage compartment between the
rear seats.
Cup holders To open: press the button.

To close: push both covers back in, one after
Safety information the other.
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder Storage compartments in the
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an cargo area
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
Storage compartment
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the A storage compartment is located on the left
cup holder.◀ side.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, refer to page 200, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
192
Storage compartments Controls
Floor net
To secure the cargo, refer to page 200, the
floor net can also be used.
193
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
specific and optional features offered with the From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
must be observed. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Breaking-in period Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together Brake system
smoothly. Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Drive moderately during this break-in period.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐

Following part replacement
trol.
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
Safety information
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
WARNING vehicle's operating life.
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐ General driving notes
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle,
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐ Closing the tailgate
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of
the respective parts and components.◀ Safety information
WARNING
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
speed: neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
100 mph/160 km/h. of damage to property. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
196
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Driving with the tailgate open surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be steer and brake the vehicle.
avoided:
Driving through water
▷ If the hardtop is closed, close all windows.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. General information
▷ Drive moderately. When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
Hot exhaust system ▷ Drive through calm water only.
WARNING ▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
During driving operation, high tempera‐ than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm.
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body, ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust Safety information
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do NOTE
not remove the heat shields installed and never When driving too quickly through too
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no deep water, water can enter into the engine
combustible materials can come in contact compartment, the electrical system or the
with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐ age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
haust system.◀ ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
Mobile communication devices in the ter.◀
vehicle
WARNING
Braking safely
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
ard feature.
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile Perform an emergency stop in situations that
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐ require such.
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐ Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐ any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to fort.
exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐ Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀ the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Hydroplaning In certain braking situations, the perforated
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can brake discs can emit functional noises. Func‐
form between the tires and road surface. tional noises have no effect on the perform‐
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ ance and operational reliability of the brake.
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
197
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Objects in the movement area around of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
pedals and floor area on the brake system.◀
WARNING WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit In idle state or with the engine switched
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in gine braking effect, braking force boost and
the vehicle such that they are secured and steering assistance, are restricted or not avail‐
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use able at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and drive in idle state or with the engine switched
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use off.◀
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
Brake disc corrosion
are securely fastened again after they were re‐ Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀ tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
Driving in wet conditions ▷ Low mileage.
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
gently press the brake pedal every few miles. used at all.
Ensure that this action does not endanger ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
other traffic. ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
The heat generated during braking dries brake agents.
discs and brake pads and protects them Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
against corrosion. a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
In this way braking efficiency will be available sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
when you need it.
Condensation water under the parked
Hills vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
General information condensation water develops and collects un‐
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the derneath the vehicle.
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency. Driving on racetracks
You can increase the engine's braking effect Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
if needed. This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
Safety information competition.
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
198
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle features and options NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due NOTE
pieces of luggage in the side area of the cargo
area can limit the area of movement of the
hardtop and the loading aid. There is a risk of
must be observed.
property damage. Make sure that the move‐
ment area of the hardtop and loading aid is
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires, Steps for Determining
damage them internally and cause a sudden Correct Load Limit
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing 1. Locate the statement “The combined
lane stability, lengthening the braking distan‐ weight of occupants and cargo should
ces and changing the steering response. never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to vehicle’s placard.
the permitted load capacity of the tires and 2. Determine the combined weight of the
never exceed the permitted gross weight.◀ driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
WARNING
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
Loose objects or devices with a cable
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while 4. The resulting figure equals the available
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐ amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
vehicle's interior.◀ amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) =
WARNING 650 lbs.)
Improperly stowed objects can shift and 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
199
Driving tips Loading
available cargo and luggage load capacity ▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
calculated in Step 4. ratchet straps, the floor net, or draw straps.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
from your trailer will be transferred to your straps.
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
Load
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area

for securing cargo.
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo. Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
The greater the weight of the occupants, the straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
less cargo that can be transported. nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
Stowing and securing cargo
To secure the cargo the floor net can also be
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the used.
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Use loading aid, refer to page 187, for eas‐ Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
ier loading. area floor.
▷ Loading the cargo area, refer to page 186.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
200
Saving fuel Driving tips
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Tires
General information
series. It also describes features that are not Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
to the selected options or country versions. sumption.
and systems. When using these functions and Check the tire inflation pressure
systems, the applicable laws and regulations regularly
must be observed. Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
General information Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
tire wear.
for the reduction of fuel consumption and
emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Drive away immediately
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
erate driving style and regular maintenance, the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
ronmental impact. This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
Remove attached parts consumption.
following use Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. cle driving ahead of you.
Closing the windows Avoid high engine speeds

Open windows increase air resistance and As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
therefore lead to greater fuel consumption. fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
201
Driving tips Saving fuel
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐ Switch off any functions that
gine speeds.
are not currently needed
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with low Functions such as seat heating and the rear
engine speed and at a constant speed. window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift
and-go traffic.
indicator, refer to page 103.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Use coasting The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort features.
When approaching a red light, take your foot These functions are automatically deactivated
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to partially or completely.
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll. Have maintenance carried
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
Switch off the engine during BMW recommends that maintenance work be
longer stops performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
Switching off the engine
System, refer to page 239.
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
ECO PRO
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
tomatically switches off the engine during a
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
stop.
gine control and comfort features, for instance
If the engine is switched off and then restarted the climate control output, are adjusted.
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
matically decoupled from the transmission in
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
onds of switching off the engine.
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ duce fuel consumption. The D selector lever
mined by other factors, such as driving style, position remains engaged.
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
factors.
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
202
General information 3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

The system includes the following 4. "Configure ECO PRO"
EfficientDynamics functions and 5. Select the desired setting.
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 204. used.
▷ Activate/deactivate the display, refer to
page 204. Activating/deactivating the functions
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to The following functions can be activated/deac‐
page 203. tivated:
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
page 205. ▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 206. ▷ "Coasting"
Overview
rently used.
ECO PRO limit

▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning":
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed
of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Tip at:"
Driving Dynamics Control Select the desired speed.
ECO PRO climate control

Activating ECO PRO
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
Press button repeatedly until ECO That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from
PRO is displayed in the instrument the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
cluster. interior more slowly, to economize on fuel con‐
sumption.
Configuring ECO PRO In addition, the power output to the seat and
mirror heating is reduced.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activate ECO PRO. Coasting
2. "Configure ECO PRO" Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and coasting with the engine
idling.
Using iDrive Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐
fect of the engine when traveling downhill.
1. "My Vehicle"
203
ECO PRO potential savings the pointer remains in the blue range on the
Shows potential savings with the current set‐ scale, you are driving efficiently.
tings in percentages.
ECO PRO tip, driving tip
Display in the instrument cluster The ECO PRO tip indicates that the
driving style can be adjusted to be
Display in the instrument display more fuel efficient, for example by
When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display backing off the accelerator.
switches to a special configuration.
Blue bar segments symbolize the gained bo‐ Activating/deactivating the display
nus range in stages. 1. "My Vehicle"
In addition, the bonus range is highlighted in 2. "iDrive settings"
blue in the total range display.
3. "Displays"
ECO PRO bonus range 4. "Instrument panel"
An adjusted driving style helps 5. "ECO PRO info"

you extend your driving range. In the instrument display:
This may be displayed as the Using iDrive:
bonus range in the instrument
1. "My Vehicle"
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
3. "Displays"
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled. 4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Driving mode view"
ECO PRO efficiency display
ECO PRO tip, symbols
The color of the ECO PRO displays in the in‐
strument cluster tell you how efficiently you An additional symbol and text instructions are
are driving: displayed.
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style. Symbol Measure

▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, for exam‐ For efficient driving back off the ac‐
ple by backing off the accelerator pedal. celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
The display switches to blue as soon as all low time to assess road conditions.
conditions for driving with optimized fuel effi‐
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
ciency are met.
PRO speed.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
ECO PRO displays also inform you about your Steptronic transmission:
current driving style. This is indicated by a
Switch from M/S to D and avoid
pointer which moves along a scale. The pointer
manual shift interventions.
tells you whether energy is being consumed to
accelerate the vehicle or whether energy is be‐
ing recovered through coasting and braking. If
204
Indications on the Control Display To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
Displaying EfficientDynamics sion when selector lever position D is set. The
information vehicle continues traveling with the engine
The current efficiency of the ECO PRO func‐ idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
tions can be displayed on the Control Display. lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
1. "My Vehicle"
ing.
2. "Technology in action"
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
3. "EfficientDynamics" tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
4. Select the symbol. again.
The following functions are displayed:
General information
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
▷ Energy recovery. ing mode.
▷ Coasting. Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Displaying fuel consumption history Control.
The average consumption can be displayed on The function is available in a certain speed
the Control Display. range.
1. "My Vehicle" A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
2. "Technology in action" the function as often as possible and supports
the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol. Functional requirements
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
lected time frame. a speed range from approximately
30 mph/50 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h if the
Adjusting the fuel consumption following conditions are met:
history time frame
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
1. Press button.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
2. Adjust the time frame.
tion D.
Reset fuel consumption history ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
1. Press button.
Operation via shift paddles
2. "Reset consumption history"
Concept
Coasting
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
Concept coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
paddles.
This function helps to save fuel.
205
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift System limits

paddles The function is not available if one of the fol‐
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right lowing conditions applies:
shift paddle. ▷ If DSC OFF or TRACTION is activated.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the ▷ If cruise control is activated.
right shift paddle again.
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
Display ▷ If the battery charge state is temporarily
too low.
Display in the instrument cluster ▷ If the vehicle electrical system is drawing
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in excessive current.
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐
ometer approximately indicates idle speed. Driving style analysis
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
Indications on the Control Display cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
The coasting mode is displayed in For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
EfficientDynamics while driving. The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
The distance traveled in coasting mode is
shown in the fuel consumption history. The This display will help you adjust your driving
counter is reset prior to every departure. style and save some fuel.
The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adopting an efficient driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
The function is only available in ECO PRO
Color code blue: coasting mode. mode.
Displaying Efficient Dynamics information Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
3. "Driving style analysis"
206
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐

ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
of stars are displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving
fuel, refer to page 201.
207
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options Fuel cap
Opening
series. It also describes features that are not 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due flap.
must be observed.
General information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 212, prior to refueling. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
210
Refueling Mobility
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Observe the following when

refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Avoid overfilling.◀
211
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTE

specific and optional features offered with the Do not press the Start/Stop button after
series. It also describes features that are not refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
to the selected options or country versions. There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
This also applies to safety-related functions fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
and systems. When using these functions and engines:
systems, the applicable laws and regulations ▷ Leaded gasoline.
must be observed.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
Fuel recommendation
ter or repair shop.◀
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations NOTE
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier. to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
Gasoline refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline NOTE
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
tent. mum quality can compromise engine function
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
taining metal must not be used. property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. CAUTION
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result
dards: in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
US: ASTM 4806–xx tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
xx: comply with the current standard in each
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
case.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
212
Fuel Mobility
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to

purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
213
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
to the selected options or country versions. inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
This also applies to safety-related functions Monitor.
and systems. When using these functions and For Tire Pressure Monitor: perform a reset of
systems, the applicable laws and regulations the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting tire
must be observed. pressure to a new value.
Tire inflation pressure specifications

Tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 215, contains all tire inflation pressure
General information specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following: sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
▷ The service life of the tires. manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
▷ Road safety.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
▷ Driving comfort. please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Safety information
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation Tire inflation pressures up to
pressure impacts handling, such as steering 100 mph/160 km/h
and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
month and before a long trip.◀
to page 215, and adjust as necessary.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold, i.e., after driving no more than
1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 2 hours.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires at ambient
temperature.
214
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.3 / 33 -

18 95 Y XL Std
Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.5 / 36

18 99 Y XL Std
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 -

These pressure values can also be found on 89 Y RSC
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41
door pillar. 92 Y RSC
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. Front: 225/35 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
90 Y XL RSC
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.2 / 46
92 Y XL RSC
430i, 430i xDrive Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
in bar/PSI
Specifications in 440i, 440i xDrive

bar/PSI with cold
tires Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
225/50 R 17 94 H 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 Specifications in
M+S RSC bar/PSI with cold
225/50 R 17 94 V tires
M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
225/50 R 17 94 H 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
M+S XL A/S RSC
M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 Y
225/45 R 18 95 V
XL RSC
M+S XL A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
225/45 R 18 95 Y
M+S XL RSC
XL RSC
225/40 R 19 93 V 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL A/S RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.3 / 33 - 225/40 R 19 93 V 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
91 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.5 / 36 Front: 225/45 R 18 2.3 / 33 -
95 Y RSC 91 Y RSC
215
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.5 / 36 Specifications in

95 Y RSC bar/PSI with cold
tires
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.3 / 33 -
18 95 Y XL Std
Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.5 / 36 225/50 R 17 94 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
18 99 Y XL Std M+S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 V
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 - M+S A/S RSC
89 Y RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V
Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41 M+S XL A/S RSC
92 Y RSC 225/45 R 18 95 Y
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.7 / 39 - XL RSC
90 Y XL RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V 3.0 / 44 3.5 / 51
Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.2 / 46 M+S XL RSC
92 Y XL RSC 225/40 R 19 93 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h Front: 225/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 -
M 4.2 / 60 91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41
Tire inflation pressures at max. 95 Y RSC
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.6 / 38 -
WARNING 18 95 Y XL Std
In order to drive at maximum speeds in Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, 18 99 Y XL Std
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the Front: 225/40 R 19 2.8 / 41 -
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ 89 Y RSC
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for 92 Y RSC
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
Front: 225/35 R 20 3.0 / 44 -
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
90 Y XL RSC
to page 216, and adjust as necessary.
Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.5 / 51
Tire inflation pressure values over 92 Y XL RSC
100 mph/160 km/h
430i, 430i xDrive T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
Without high-speed tuning feature M 4.2 / 60
216
With high-speed tuning feature 440i, 440i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications Without high-speed tuning feature
in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications
Specifications in in bar/PSI
bar/PSI with cold Specifications in
tires bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45

M+S RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
225/45 R 18 95 Y M+S RSC
XL RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V
225/45 R 18 95 V 3.0 / 44 3.5 / 51 M+S XL A/S RSC
M+S XL RSC 225/45 R 18 95 Y
XL RSC
Front: 2.6 / 38 -
225/45 R 18 91 Y 225/45 R 18 95 V 3.0 / 44 3.5 / 51
RSC M+S XL RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41 225/40 R 19 93 V

95 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 -

18 95 Y XL Std 91 Y RSC
Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41

18 99 Y XL Std 95 Y RSC
Front: 2.8 / 41 - Front: 225/45 ZR 2.6 / 38 -

225/40 R 19 89 Y 18 95 Y XL Std
RSC Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41
Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 18 99 Y XL Std
92 Y RSC Front: 225/40 R 19 2.8 / 41 -
Front: 225/35 3.0 / 44 - 89 Y RSC
R 20 90 Y XL RSC Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45
Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.5 / 51 92 Y RSC
92 Y XL RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 3.0 / 44 -
Emergency Speed up to a max. of 90 Y XL RSC
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.5 / 51
T 135/80 R 17 4.2 / 60 92 Y XL RSC
102 M
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
217
With high-speed tuning feature Tire identification marks

in bar/PSI Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold 245: nominal width in mm
tires 45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
225/45 R 18 95 Y 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 18: rim diameter in inches

XL RSC 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
225/50 R 17 94 H Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
M+S RSC
Maximum tire load
225/45 R 18 95 V 3.0 / 44 3.5 / 51
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
M+S XL RSC
weight for which the tire is approved.
Front: 2.6 / 38 - Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
225/45 R 18 91 Y wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR
RSC – on the certification label on the driver’s door
Rear: 255/40 R 18 - 2.8 / 41 pillar.
95 Y RSC Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle
Front: 225/45 ZR 2.6 / 38 -
Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
18 95 Y XL Std
GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Rear: 255/40 ZR - 2.8 / 41
18 99 Y XL Std Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
Front: 2.8 / 41 -
225/40 R 19 89 Y R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
RSC S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
Rear: 255/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
92 Y RSC H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
Front: 225/35 3.0 / 44 - V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
R 20 90 Y XL RSC W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Rear: 255/30 R 20 - 3.5 / 51 Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
92 Y XL RSC
Tire Identification Number
Emergency Speed up to a max. of
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0117
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
T 135/80 R 17 4.2 / 60
102 M xxx: tire size and tire design
0117: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
218
Tire age test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

DOT … 0117: the tire was manufactured in the marked C may have poor traction performance.
1st week of 2017. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
Recommendation and does not include acceleration, cornering,
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
least every 6 years.
Temperature
Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Quality grades can be found where applicable and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and maximum section width. heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
ture A
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
DOT Quality Grades sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger
Traction AA A B C vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
Temperature A B C tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to required by law.
these grades.
WARNING
Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 in combination, can cause heat buildup and
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well possible tire failure.◀
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends RSC – Run-flat tires
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 222, are labeled
ever, and may depart significantly from the with a circular symbol containing the letters
norm due to variations in driving habits, service RSC marked on the sidewall.
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
Traction
weather performance than summer tires.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
219
Tire tread ioning between the wheel and the road. Be

careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
Summer tires speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 inches/3 mm. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
There is an increased risk of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐ ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
ches/3 mm. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Winter tires Damage can, e.g., be caused by driving over
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than curbs, road damage, or similar things.
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires Safety information
are less suitable for winter operation. WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
Minimum tread depth
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
Have vehicle towed or transported as
needed.◀
WARNING
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐ pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
ches/1.6 mm. control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
The wear indicators are marked on the tire placed.◀
sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving
Tire damage over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
General information cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec‐
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
is a danger of accidents and property damage.
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, over them slowly and carefully.◀
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
220
Changing wheels and tires Recommended tire brands
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐ For each tire size, BMW recommends certain
other qualified service center or repair shop tire brands. The tire brands can be identified
about the correct wheel/tire combination and by a star on the tire sidewall.
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair New tires
the function of a variety of systems such as
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ABS or DSC.
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ they achieve their full traction potential after a
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ break-in time.
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Drive conservatively for the first
Following tire damage, have the original wheel 200 miles/300 km.
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible. Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
Safety information
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
Retreaded tires can have different tire
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
due to tolerances despite the same official size
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The man‐
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
ufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests
that you use wheels and tires that have been
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for Winter tires
your vehicle type.◀ Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
221
Maximum speed of winter tires Run-flat tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires, Concept
then attach a corresponding information label/ Run-flat tires permit continued driving under
sticker in the field of view. The label is available restricted conditions even in the event of a
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere General information
to the permissible maximum speed. The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
Run-flat tires cial rims.
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
own safety you should replace them only with remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
Follow the instructions for continued driving
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
with a flat tire.
Label
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐
mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure
and correct, if needed.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or RSC label on the tire sidewall.
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Changing run-flat tires
Storage
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
place.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, additional questions at any time.
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
222
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by ▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
setting the parking brake. other qualified service center or repair
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐ ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
side the immediate area in a safe place, that have penetrated the tire.
such as behind a guardrail. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or container and apply it to the steering
portable hazard warning light at a sufficient wheel.
distance. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
▷ Change wheels only on a flat, solid and wheel electronics. In this case, have the
slip-resistant surface. On soft or slippery electronics checked and replaced at the
ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc., next opportunity.
the vehicle or the vehicle jack may slip
away sideways. Storage
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items The Mobility System is located under the
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot cargo floor panel.
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height. Sealant container
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine, or else
there is a danger to life.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside. Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
The compressor can be used to check the tire

inflation pressure.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
223
Compressor 2. Take the connection hose completely out

of the compressor housing. Do not kink the
hose.
1 On/off switch
2 Holder for sealant container
3 Reduce inflation pressure 3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐
tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it
4 Inflation pressure dial
engages audibly.
5 Compressor
6 Connector/cable for socket
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom
of the compressor
Filling the tire with sealant

1. Shake the sealant container.
4. Slide the sealing container upright into the

holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐
ing that it engages audibly.
224
5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire NOTE

valve of the nonworking wheel. The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐

nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
6. With the compressor switched off, insert sor at this point.
the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
hicle. reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
7. With the ignition switched on or the engine repair shop.
running, switch on the compressor.
Stowing the Mobility System
1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐
ant container from the wheel.
2. Remove the connection hose from the
sealant container.
3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐
nection hose in suitable material to avoid
dirtying the cargo area.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
DANGER cle.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
Distributing the sealant
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐ sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also tire.
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
225
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
12 mph/20 km/h. ton on the compressor.
Correcting the tire inflation pressure Continuing the trip

1. Stop at a suitable location. Do not exceed the maximum permissible
2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
valve stem. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
3. Attach the connection hose directly to the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
compressor. fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
4. Insert the connector into the power socket suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
inside the vehicle. contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount
snow chains on tires that are designated by
their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.◀
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped

with the tires of the following size:
▷ 225/50 R 17.
▷ 225/45 R 18.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
2.5 bar. tions.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition Make sure that the snow chains are always
switched on or the engine running, sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐
switch on the compressor.
226
cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐ WARNING

structions. On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow,
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away.
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the
in incorrect readings. tire/wheel on a flat, solid and slip-resistant sur‐
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after face.◀
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
WARNING
in incorrect readings.
The vehicle jack is only provided for
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
Dynamic Traction Control, if needed.
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
Maximum speed with snow chains ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
when using snow chains. raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
Changing wheels/tires WARNING

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
General information the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
does not always need to be changed immedi‐ any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
ately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat jack.◀
tire.
WARNING
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
pair shop.
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
Safety information
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is
WARNING inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel
The vehicle jack is provided by the vehi‐ housing.◀
cle manufacturer for changing wheels in the
WARNING
event of a flat tire. The vehicle jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use, for instance for chang‐ A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
ing from summer to winter tires. Using the ve‐ may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
hicle jack frequently may cause it to jam or erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
become damaged. There is a risk of injury and damage to property. While the vehicle is
risk of damage to property. Only use the vehi‐ raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle
cle jack to change an emergency wheel or a or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
spare tire in the event of a flat tire.◀ wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
227
Securing the vehicle against rolling ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
General information
▷ Engage a gear or selector lever position P.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
away when changing a wheel.
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
On a level surface
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for ex‐
restricted height.
ample a rock, in front of and behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that ▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
you wish to change. ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
On a slight downhill gradient
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
If you need to change a wheel on a slight

downhill grade, place chocks and other suita‐ The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
ble objects, for instance a rock, under the cated at the indicated positions.
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
the rolling direction. Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Preparing the vehicle Hands and fingers can be jammed when
▷ Change the wheel as far away as possible using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
from passing traffic. Comply with the described hand position and
▷ Park the vehicle on solid, non-slip and level
ground.
228
do not change this position while using the ve‐ 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
hicle jack.◀ tended vertically.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐

row 1, and grasp the crank with your other
hand, arrow 2.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands

vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire

surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
crank or lever clockwise.
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the

wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
as the vehicle jack is under load and con‐ hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
tinue turning the crank or lever with one companying lug bolts may have to be used
hand. as well.
3. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
229
4. Turn the crank on the vehicle jack counter‐

clockwise to retract the jack and lower the
vehicle.
5. Remove the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop to have the damaged tire replaced.
230
Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck

2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir
3 Filler neck for washer fluid The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
5 Engine compartment fuse box
231
Mobility Engine compartment
Hood NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
Safety information when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
WARNING
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
Improperly executed work in the engine down onto the windshield before opening the
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐ hood.◀
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Opening the hood
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
the engine compartment be performed by a Hood is unlocked.
service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, for in‐
stance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away from 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
moving parts.◀ again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance Indicator/warning lights
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
message is displayed.
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
Closing the hood
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀ 16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage on both sides.
232
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Electronic oil measurement
Status display
Concept
to the selected options or country versions. The engine oil level is monitored electronically
This also applies to safety-related functions while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
and systems. When using these functions and play.
systems, the applicable laws and regulations If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
must be observed. level, a Check Control message is displayed.
General information A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
the driving style and driving conditions.
is displayed.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
the following situations, for example:
perform a detailed measurement.
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine. Displaying the engine oil level
▷ Idling of the engine. Using iDrive:
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
fied as not suitable.
2. "Vehicle status"
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
3. "Engine oil level"
after refueling.
The engine oil level is displayed.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
Engine oil level display messages
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles: Concept
▷ Status display. Different messages appear on the display de‐
▷ Detailed measurement. pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
A red indicator light indicates that the
engine oil pressure is too low.
233
Mobility Engine oil
Safety information Using iDrive:

NOTE 1. "My Vehicle"
An engine oil level that is too low causes 2. "Vehicle status"
engine damage. There is a risk of property 3. "Engine oil level"
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
4. "Measure engine oil level"
NOTE 5. "Start measurement"
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐ The engine oil level is checked and displayed
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk via a scale.
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
Time: approx. 1 minute.
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
pair shop.◀ Adding engine oil
General information
Detailed measurement
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
Concept
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
In the detailed measurement the engine oil played in the instrument cluster.
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary,
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
and displayed via a scale.
cle before engine oil is added.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
level, a Check Control message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ Safety information
creased somewhat.
WARNING
General information Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
A detailed measurement is only possible with coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
certain engines. ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Functional requirements Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
erating materials into different bottles. Store
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in operating materials out of reach of children.◀
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed. NOTE
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ An engine oil level that is too low causes
perature. engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage.
Performing a detailed measurement Add engine oil within the next
In order to perform a detailed measurement of 125 miles/200 km.◀
the engine oil level: confirm the message re‐
garding the engine oil level display.
234
Engine oil Mobility
NOTE NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐ Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐ of property damage. When selecting an engine
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added, oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service rect oil rating.◀
pair shop.◀ Suitable engine oil types
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
Overview ing oil rating standards:
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
Gasoline engine
partment, refer to page 231.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Opening the oil filler neck
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 232.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
suitable for particular gasoline engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils is available
at a dealer’s service center or another qualified
Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
3. Add engine oil. gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Engine oil types to add Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
General information
API SL or superior oil rating.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Viscosity grades
Safety information Gasoline engine:
NOTE When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
Oil additives can damage the engine. the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use 0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity
oil additives.◀ grade is indicated on a label in the engine com‐
partment. Alternatively, also engine oils with
viscosity grades SAE 5W-20, SAE 5W-30,
SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 can be used.
235
Mobility Engine oil
The viscosity grades SAE 0W-20 or SAE

5W-20 are only suitable for particular engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Engine oil change

NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
236
Coolant Mobility
Coolant
Vehicle features and options Coolant level
General information
series. It also describes features that are not The coolant level is indicted using minimum
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due and maximum markings. Depending on the
to the selected options or country versions. coolant reservoir, the minimum and maximum
This also applies to safety-related functions markings are located at different locations.
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Concept
must be observed. Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.
General information
Checking the coolant level on the side
Not all commercially available additives are markings
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
1. Let the engine cool.
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or 2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
repair shop. tween the minimum and maximum marks.
The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
Safety information
Symbol Meaning
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐ Maximum
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
Minimum
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
237
Mobility Coolant
Checking the coolant level in the filler Adding

neck 1. Let the engine cool.
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
coolant reservoir. counterclockwise to allow any excess
1. Let the engine cool. pressure to dissipate, then open it.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up

to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
in the filler neck. nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
238
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 102, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
This also applies to safety-related functions Information on the required maintenance is
and systems. When using these functions and continuously stored in the remote control. The
systems, the applicable laws and regulations dealer’s service center can read this data out
must be observed. and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
BMW maintenance system control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
Storage periods
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle. Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary count.
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
rately. Further information is available from a update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
dealer’s service center or another qualified cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
service center or repair shop. necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Condition Based Service

Service and Warranty
CBS
Information Booklet for US
Concept models and Warranty and
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ Service Guide Booklet for
count the driving conditions of the vehicle. Canadian models
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
maintenance.
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
The system makes it possible to adapt the and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
amount of maintenance corresponding to your els for additional information on service re‐
user profile. quirements.
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
239
Mobility Maintenance
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐ Emissions

lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
tained.
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Socket for OBD Onboard
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
Diagnosis
circumstances:
Safety information This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
NOTE
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
system checked immediately; otherwise,
intricate component intended to be used in
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
conjunction with specialized equipment to
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
trol components, in particular the catalytic
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
converter.
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
240
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 86.
series. It also describes features that are not 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
to the selected options or country versions. fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the

catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
NOTE
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under Folded-away wipers can be jammed
the cargo floor panel. when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
Wiper blade replacement
hood.◀
Safety information
NOTE
Light and bulb replacement
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐ General information
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐ Lights and bulbs
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
tion to vehicle safety.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have the relevant work carried out a deal‐
241
Mobility Replacing components
er’s service center or another qualified service Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

center or repair shop.
WARNING
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
ter or repair shop.
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
Observe the safety information, refer to or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
page 242. covers.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Headlight glass
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
source. These light-emitting diodes, which are
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
related to conventional lasers, are officially
densation evaporates after a short time. The
designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
Observe the safety information, refer to
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
page 242.
increasing humidity forms, e.g., water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
Safety information recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
Lights and bulbs ter or repair shop.
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐ Headlight setting
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a The headlight adjustments can be affected by
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
have cooled off.◀ adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
WARNING center or another qualified service center or re‐
Work on switched-on lighting systems pair shop.
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of property damage. When working Front lights, bulb replacement
on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐ LED headlights
turer's instructions.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
NOTE
All front lamps and side turn signals are de‐
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. signed with LED technology.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
ter or repair shop.
its base.◀
Halogen front fog lights

Observe the safety information, refer to
page 242.
242
35-watt bulb, H8. contact a dealer’s service center or another

1. Use the handle of the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.
Carefully pull back the wheel house panel,
Tail lights, license plate lights, and
arrow 2.
center brake light
These lights are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1. The battery is maintenance-free.
Turn the bulb, arrow 2. The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. service life of the battery.
Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐ More information about the battery can be re‐
wise. quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Remove the bulb. other qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector tures will be available without restriction and
and screw on the wheel house panel. any Check Control messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will disappear.
LED front fog lights
These front fog lights are made using LED Safety information
technology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐ NOTE
tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop. Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
Turn signal in exterior mirror
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature are compatible with your vehicle type should
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, be installed in your vehicle. Information on
243
Mobility Replacing components
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your Disposing of old batteries

dealer’s service center.◀
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
Charging the battery qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
General information Maintain the battery in an upright position for
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ transport and storage. Secure the battery so
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery that it does not tip over during transport.
remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light. Fuses
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
Safety information
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance WARNING
drives. Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a electrical lines and components. There is a risk
month. of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
Safety information stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
NOTE
Replacing a fuse
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
The fuses are located in two different places in
can work with high voltages and currents,
the vehicle.
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐ types and locations are stored in the fuse box
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the in the cargo area.
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀ In the engine compartment
General information
Starting aid terminals
On right-hand drive vehicles, the fuses are lo‐
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
cated on the opposite side of the engine com‐
starting aid terminals, refer to page 248, in the
partment.
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
244
Removing the cover In the cargo area

1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.

3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is

found on a separate sheet.
Attaching the covers

1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the

three screws.
245
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Overview

must be observed.
SOS button at the interior mirror
Hazard warning flashers Functional requirements

▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically
Under certain conditions, such as if the airbags
The button is located in the center console. trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
cally initiated immediately after a severe acci‐
The red light in the button flashes when the dent. Automatic Collision Notification is not af‐
hazard warning flashers are activated. fected by pressing the SOS button.
Initiating an Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call manually
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
Concept 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ button lights up green.
quest can be made through the system. ▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
General information
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. Display, the Emergency Request can be
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request aborted.
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐ If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
ditions. until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
246
Breakdown assistance Mobility
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection Warning triangle

to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW The warning triangle is located on the inside of
Response Center which serves to deter‐ the tailgate.
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
To remove, loosen the bracket.
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW
Response Center through the loudspeak‐ First-aid kit
ers, the BMW Response Center may still
be able to hear you. General information
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐ Some of the articles have a limited service life.
gency Request. Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Roadside Assistance
Storage
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed via iDrive or a connection to Road‐
side Assistance can be established directly. The first-aid kit is located in a compartment
under the cargo floor panel.
To open, pull on the handle.
247
Jump-starting Starting aid terminals
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
Contact with live components can lead to
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
nal.
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀ Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order The body ground or a special nut acts as the
during connection.◀ battery negative terminal.
Preparation Connecting the cables

1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ To prevent personal injury or damage to both
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
information can be found on the battery. dure.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
cle.
terminal.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
consumers in both vehicles.
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
248
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative Safety information

jumper cable to the negative terminal of
NOTE
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle. The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Tow truck
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐ The vehicle should only be transported on a
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ loading platform.
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes. NOTE
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ The vehicle can become damaged when
verse order. lifting and securing it.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed. There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
Tow-starting and towing fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Safety information Pushing the vehicle

WARNING To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger
Due to system limits, individual functions area, it can be pushed for a short distance. The
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing vehicle can only be pushed in selector lever
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, position N.
for instance approach control warning with In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐
braking function. There is a risk of an accident. ceed as follows:
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
2. Depress brake pedal.
Steptronic transmission: transporting 3. Engage selector lever position N.
the vehicle If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
249
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, re‐ Tow rope

fer to page 91, if needed. When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Towing other vehicles
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐ Tow fitting
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐ General information
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐ ried in the vehicle.
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀ The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
NOTE The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐ refer to page 241, are together in the cargo
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can area.
occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐ Use of the tow fitting:
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
Tow bar
roads only.
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting fitting.
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
Safety information
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
NOTE
around corners.
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
there may be damage to the vehicle or to the
is secured with an offset.
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Observe the notes on using the tow fit‐
ting.◀
250
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
251
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options Automatic vehicle washes
This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information

series. It also describes features that are not NOTE
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Water can penetrate in the windshield
to the selected options or country versions. area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
This also applies to safety-related functions risk of property damage. Avoid high-pressure
and systems. When using these functions and washers.◀
must be observed. NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
Vehicle washes There is a risk of damage to property. Follow
the following instructions:
General information ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
Regularly remove foreign objects such as those that use soft brushes in order to
leaves in the area below the windshield when avoid paint damage.
the hood is raised. ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ the chassis.
age the vehicle. ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
Steam blaster and high-pressure ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
washer the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
Safety information
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
NOTE tem.◀
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the Before driving into a vehicle wash
pressure or temperatures being too high. In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
There is a risk of property damage. Maintain vehicle wash, take the following steps:
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
Steptronic transmission:
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀ 1. Drive into the vehicle wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
Distances and temperature 3. Switch off the engine.
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. In this way, the ignition remains switched
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
seals: 12 inches/30 cm. played.
252
Care Mobility
NOTE After washing the vehicle

Selector lever position P is automati‐ After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
cally engaged when the ignition is briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
switched off. There is a risk of property can be reduced. The heat generated during
damage. Do not switch drive-ready state braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
off in vehicle washes.◀ protects them against corrosion.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in Completely remove all residues on the win‐
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
the outside when in selector lever position N. A smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock wiper blade wear.
the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash Vehicle care

To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐
sion: Vehicle care products
1. Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. General information

2. Depress the brake pedal. BMW recommends using vehicle care and
3. Press the Start/Stop button. cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
pair shop.
Selector lever position
Safety information
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally: WARNING
▷ When the ignition is switched off. Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
Headlights products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use low the instructions on the container.◀
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance Vehicle paint
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water. General information
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice Regular care contributes to driving safety and
scraper. value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
Lowerable hardtop taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
When the wet hardtop is opened, water drop‐ fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
lets can run into the cargo area. Remove any quency and extent of your vehicle care to
objects in the cargo area beforehand to pre‐ these influences.
vent water spotting or soiling. Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
253
Mobility Care
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ Caring for special components
tered or discolored.
Light-alloy wheels
Matte finish When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
Only use cleaning and care products suitable wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
for vehicles with matte finish. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
Leather care turer's instructions.
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
a cloth or vacuum cleaner. can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime components, such as the brake disc.
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
wear and premature degradation of the leather them. The heat generated during braking dries
surface. brake discs and brake pads and protects them
To guard against discoloration, such as from against corrosion.
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months. Chrome surfaces
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
more visible. of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
salt.
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Rubber components
Upholstery material care Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
General information only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
or noises.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the Fine wood parts
material vigorously.
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
Safety information soft cloth.
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of Plastic components
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is NOTE
a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
254
Care Mobility
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐ are securely fastened again after they were re‐
age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
cloth lightly with water.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
Plastic components are e.g.: rior for cleaning.
▷ Imitation leather surfaces. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
▷ Roofliner. microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
▷ Lamp lenses.
forth in the direction of travel only.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components. Sensor/camera lenses
▷ Painted parts in the interior. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
Clean with a microfiber cloth. cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner. Displays/Screens/protective glass of
the Head-up Display
Safety belts
NOTE
WARNING Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
Chemical cleansers can destroy the any kind can damage the surface of displays
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution cloth.◀
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
NOTE
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
The surface of displays can be damaged
thus have a negative impact on safety.
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
belts clipped into their buckles. and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
belts until they are dry.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
Carpets and floor mats play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit Long-term vehicle storage
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in three months, special measures must be
the vehicle such that they are secured and taken. Further information is available from a
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use dealer’s service center or another qualified
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and service center or repair shop.
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
255
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in this cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. center or another qualified service center or re‐
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, pair shop.
e.g., due to the selected special equipment, The information in the vehicle documents al‐
country version or country-specific measure‐ ways has priority over the information in this
ment method. Detailed values can be found in Owner's Manual.
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
model version, equipment or country-specific the selected special equipment, tires, load and
measurement method. chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
BMW 4 Series Convertible
Width with mirrors inches/mm 79.4/2,017
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.9/1,825
Height inches/mm 54.5-55.1/1,384-1,399
Length inches/mm 182.7/4,641
Wheelbase inches/mm 110.6/2,810
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1-38.8/11.3-11.8
258
Technical data Reference
Weights
430i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,839/2,195
Load lbs/kg 679/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,161/980
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,767/1,255
440i
Load lbs/kg 679/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,227/1,010
430i xDrive
Load lbs/kg 679/308
440i xDrive
Load lbs/kg 679/308
259
Reference Technical data
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 15.8/60.0 Fuel quality, refer to

page 212
260
Appendix Reference
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the

editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
Wireless charging tray
Mounting position of the product.
Note
This device has been tested for human expo‐
sure limits and found compliant at a minimum
distance of 4 in/10 cm during operation.
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be
maintained in every direction when operating
the device.
261
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A All-season tires, see Winter Automatic vehicle wash 252
tires 221 AUTO program, automatic cli‐
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-wheel-drive 144 mate control 175
tem 142 Alternative oil types 235 AUTO program, climate con‐
ACC, Active Cruise Control Ambient light 115 trol 172
with Stop&Go function 148 Antifreeze, washer fluid 87 AUTO program, intensity 176
Acceleration Assistant, see Antilock Brake System, Auto Start/Stop function 81
Launch Control 92 ABS 142 Auto washing 252
Accessories and parts 8 Anti-slip control, see Average fuel consump‐
Activated-charcoal filter 177 DSC 142 tion 106
Activation times, parked-car Anti-theft protection, see Average speed 106
ventilation 178 Through-loading sys‐ Axle loads, weights 259
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tem 189
tion 138 App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6 B
Active Cruise Control with Approved axle load 259
Stop&Go function, Arrival time 106 Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
ACC 148 Ashtray 184 bar support 66
Adaptive brake lights, see Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ Backrest, width 67
Brake force display 140 tance 247 Band-aids, see First-aid
Adaptive Light Control 113 Assistance when driving kit 247
Additives, oil 235 off 146 Battery replacement, vehicle
After washing vehicle 253 Attentiveness assistant 140 battery 243
Airbags 117 AUTO intensity 176 Battery replacement, vehicle
Airbags, indicator/warning Automatic climate con‐ remote control 48
light 118 trol 171 Battery, vehicle 243
Air circulation, see Recircu‐ Automatic climate control Being towed, see Tow-start‐
lated-air mode 173, 176 with enhanced features 174 ing and towing 249
Air collar 67 Automatic cruise control with Belts, safety belts 68
Air conditioning 172, 175 Stop&Go function 148 Beverage holder, cup
Air, dehumidifying, see Air Automatic Curb Monitor 72 holder 192
conditioning 172, 175 Automatic deactivation, Bluetooth connection 34
Air distribution, Front-seat passenger air‐ BMW Assist 6
manual 173, 176 bags 119 BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
Air flow, air conditioner 173 Automatic headlight con‐ BMW Homepage 6
Air flow, automatic climate trol 112 BMW Internet page 6
control 176 Automatic locking 57 BMW maintenance sys‐
Air pressure, tires 214 Automatic recirculated-air tem 239
Air vents, see Ventilation 177 control 176 Bonus range, ECO PRO 204
Alarm system 57 Automatic transmission, see Bottle holder, see Cup hold‐
Alarm, unintentional 58 Steptronic transmission 88 ers 192
Automatic unlocking 57 Brake assistant 142
262
Everything from A to Z Reference
Brake discs, break-in 196 Cargo area, enlarging 188 Climate control 171, 174
Brake force display 140 Cargo area, loading 200 Coasting 205
Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Cargo area partition 62 Coasting with engine decou‐
play 140 Cargo area, storage compart‐ pled, coasting 205
Brake pads, break-in 196 ments 192 Coasting with idling en‐
Braking, information 197 Cargo, stowing and secur‐ gine 205
Breakdown assis‐ ing 200 Cockpit 14
tance 246, 247 Carpet, care 255 Combination switch, see Turn
Break-in 196 Catalytic converter, see Hot signals 83
Brightness of Control Dis‐ exhaust system 197 Combination switch, see
play 31 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Wiper system 84
Bulb replacement 241 ice 239 Comfort Access 51
Bulb replacement, front 242 Center armrest 191 Comfort entry 47
Bulb replacement, LED head‐ Center console 16 COMFORT program, driving
lights 242 Central Information Display dynamics 146
Bulb replacement, rear 243 (CID), see Control Dis‐ Compartments in the
Bulbs and lights 241 play 18 doors 191
Button, RES 151 Central locking system 51 Compass 182
Button, Start/Stop 79 Central screen, see Control Compressor 223
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐ Display 18 Computer, see Onboard
ing 248 Changes, technical, see For Computer 105
Your Own Safety 7 Condensation on win‐
C Changing parts 241 dows 177
Changing wheels 227 Condensation under the vehi‐
California Proposition 65 Changing wheels/tires 221 cle 198
Warning 8 Chassis number, see Vehicle Condition Based Service
Calling up mirror adjust‐ identification number 10 CBS 239
ment 57 Check Control 96 Configuring driving pro‐
Calling up seat adjust‐ Checking the oil level elec‐ gram 146
ment 57 tronically 233 Confirmation signal 57
Camera-based assistance Children, seating position 75 ConnectedDrive 6
systems, see Intelligent Children, transporting ConnectedDrive Services 6
Safety 128 safely 75 Connecting device 33
Camera lenses, care 255 Child restraint fixing system Connecting mobile phone 33
Camera, rearview cam‐ LATCH 77 Connecting smartphone 33
era 161 Child restraint system 75 Connecting telephone 33
Camera, Side View 164 Child restraint systems, Connections 33
Camera, Top View 165 mounting 76 Container for washer fluid 87
Can holder, see Cup hold‐ Child seat, mounting 76 Continued driving with a flat
ers 192 Child seats 75 tire 124, 128
Care, displays 255 Chrome parts, care 254 Control Display 18
Care, vehicle 253 Cigarette lighter 184 Control Display, settings 29
Care, washing the vehi‐ City light braking function Controller 19
cle 252 warning with braking func‐ Control systems, driving sta‐
Cargo 199 tion 132 bility 142
Cargo area 188 Cleaning, displays 255
263
Convenient closing with the Date display 101 Driving instructions, break-
remote control 47 Daytime running lights 113 in 196
Convenient opening with the Defrosting, see defrosting the Driving instructions, ECO
remote control 47 windows 173 PRO 204
Convertible mode, automatic Defrosting, see Windows, de‐ Driving mode 144
climate control 172, 176 frosting 177 Driving notes, general 196
Convertible program, auto‐ Defrosting the windows 173 Driving on racetracks 198
matic climate con‐ Dehumidifying, air 172, 175 Driving stability control sys‐
trol 172, 176 Deleting personal data 32 tems 142
Convertible top, see Hard‐ Deletion of personal data 32 Driving style analysis 206
top 60 Destination distance 106 Driving tips 196
Coolant 237 Device list 33 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
Coolant level 237 Digital clock 101 trol 142
Coolant temperature 100 Digital compass 182 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
Cooling, maximum 175 Dimensions 258 trol 143
Cooling system 237 Dimmable exterior mirrors 73 Dynamic Damping Con‐
Cornering light 113 Dimmable interior mirror 73 trol 144
Corrosion on brake discs 198 Direction indicator, see Turn Dynamic Stability Control
Cosmetic mirror 184 signals 83 DSC 142
Coupling, see Pairing 33 Display in windshield 108 Dynamic Traction Control
Courtesy lights during un‐ Display lighting, see Instru‐ DTC 143
locking 47 ment lighting 115
Courtesy lights with the vehi‐ Displays 93 E
cle locked 48 Displays, care 255
Cruise control 154 Disposal, coolant 238 ECO PRO 202
Cruise control, active with Disposal, vehicle battery 244 ECO PRO bonus range 204
Stop&Go function 148 Distance control, see ECO PRO display 202
Cruise control with distance PDC 157 ECO PRO driving mode 202
control, see active cruise Distance to destination 106 ECO PRO driving style analy‐
control, ACC 148 Divided screen view, split sis 206
Cruise control without dis‐ screen 23 ECO PRO mode 202
tance control, see cruise Drive-off assistant 146 ECO PRO tips 204
control 154 Drive-off assistant, see Efficiency display, ECO
Cruising range 101 DSC 142 PRO 204
Cup holders 192 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ Efficient driving 204
Current fuel consump‐ gent Safety 128 EfficientDynamics informa‐
tion 101 Driver profiles 54 tion 205
Driver profiles, exporting pro‐ Electronic oil measure‐
D files 55 ment 233
Driver profiles, importing pro‐ Electronic Stability Program
Damage, tires 220 files 55 ESP, see DSC 142
Damping control, dy‐ Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐ Emergency release, fuel filler
namic 144 gent Safety 128 flap 211
Data protection, settings 32 Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency Request 246
Data, technical 258 trol 144 Emergency service, see
Date 30 Roadside Assistance 247
264
Emergency unlocking, tail‐ External temperature dis‐ Front-seat passenger airbags,

gate 53 play 100 automatic deactivation 119
Emergency unlocking, trans‐ External temperature warn‐ Front-seat passenger airbags,
mission lock 91 ing 100 indicator lamp 119
Energy Control 101 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 126
Energy recovery 102 F Fuel 212
Engine, automatic Start/Stop Fuel cap 210
function 81 Failure message, see Check Fuel consumption his‐
Engine, automatic switch- Control 96 tory 205
off 81 False alarm, see Unintentional Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
Engine compartment 231 alarm 58 age fuel consumption 106
Engine compartment, work‐ Fan, see Air flow 173, 176 Fuel filler flap 210
ing in 232 Filler neck for engine oil 234 Fuel gauge 100
Engine coolant 237 Fine wood, care 254 Fuel quality 212
Engine idling when driving, First-aid kit 247 Fuel recommendation 212
coasting 205 Flat tire, changing Fuel, tank capacity 260
Engine oil 233 wheels 227 Fuse 244
Engine oil, adding 234 Flat tire message, FTM 127
Engine oil additives 235 Flat tire message, TPM 124 G
Engine oil change 236 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 126
Engine oil filler neck 234 Flat tire, repairing 222 Garage door opener, see Uni‐
Engine oil temperature 100 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ versal Integrated Remote
Engine oil types, alterna‐ tor TPM 121 Control 180
tive 235 Flat tire warning light, Gasoline 212
Engine oil types, suitable 235 FTM 127 Gear shift indicator 103
Engine start, jump-start‐ Flat tire warning light, General driving notes 196
ing 248 TPM 124 General settings 29
Engine start, see Starting the Flooding 197 Glare shield 184
engine 80 Floor carpet, care 255 Glove compartment 190
Engine stop 80 Floor mats, care 255 GPS geolocation, vehicle po‐
Engine temperature 100 Fogged up windows 173 sition 30
Entering a vehicle wash 252 Fold-away position, wiper 86 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
Equipment, interior 180 Fold back rear seat back‐ proved 259
Error displays, see Check rests 188
Control 96 Foot brake 197 H
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ For Your Own Safety 7
gram, see DSC 142 Front airbags 117 Handbrake, see parking
Exchanging wheels/tires 221 Front-end collision warning brake 83
Exhaust system 197 with City Braking func‐ Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
Exiting a vehicle wash 252 tion 129 nating code 181
Exterior mirror, automatic Front fog lights 114 Hardtop 60
dimming feature 73 Front fog lights, halogen, bulb Hardtop, cargo area parti‐
Exterior mirrors 72 replacement 242 tion 62
Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐ Front fog lights, LED, bulb re‐ Hardtop, rollover protection
tion 72 placement 243 system 120
External start 248 Front lights 242 Hazard warning flashers 246
265
Headlamps 242 Indicator/warning lights, see Interval display, service re‐

Headlight control, auto‐ Check Control 96 quirements 102
matic 112 Indicator light, see Check Interval mode 85
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ Control 96 In the vicinity of the center
ture 112 Individual air distribu‐ console 16
Headlight flasher 84 tion 173, 176 In the vicinity of the roof‐
Headlight glass 242 Individual settings, see driver liner 17
Headlights, care 253 profiles 54 In the vicinity of the steering
Head restraints, front 70 Inflation pressure, tires 214 wheel 14
Head-up Display 108 Inflation pressure warning
Head-up Display, care 255 FTM, tires 126 J
Head-up Display, see Mem‐ Info Display, see Onboard
ory function 71 Computer 105 Jacking points for the vehicle
Heating, neck 67 Information 6 jack 228
Heavy cargo, stowing Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Jump-starting 248
cargo 200 tor TPM 122
Height, vehicle 258 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor K
High-beam Assistant 114 FTM 126
High beams 84 Instrument cluster 93 Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
High beams/low beams, see Instrument display, multifunc‐ cess 51
High-beam Assistant 114 tional 93 Key, mechanical 50
Hills 198 Instrument lighting 115 Key, see Remote control 46
Hill start assistant, see Drive- Integrated key 50 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
off assistant 146 Integrated Owner's Manual in mission 89
Holder for beverages 192 the vehicle 41 Knee airbag 117
Homepage 6 Intelligent emergency
Hood 232 call 246 L
Horn 14 Intelligent Safety 128
Hot exhaust system 197 Intended use 7 Label on recommended
HUD Head-up Display 108 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ tires 221
Hydroplaning 197 gram 176 Lamp replacement, front 242
Interior equipment 180 Lamp replacement, rear 243
I Interior lights 115 Lane departure warning 137
Interior lights during unlock‐ Lane margin, warning 137
Ice warning, see External ing 47 Language, on the Control
temperature warning 100 Interior lights with the vehicle Display 29
Icy roads, see External tem‐ locked 48 LATCH child restraint fixing
perature warning 100 Interior mirror, automatic dim‐ system 77
Identification marks, tires 218 ming feature 73 Launch Control 92
Identification number, see Ve‐ Interior mirror, compass 182 Leather, care 254
hicle identification num‐ Interior mirror, manually dim‐ LED light, bulb replace‐
ber 10 mable 73 ment 242
iDrive 18 Interior motion sensor 58 LEDs, light-emitting di‐
Ignition off 79 Internet connection 36 odes 242
Ignition on 79 Internet hotspot 36 Length, vehicle 258
Internet page 6 Light 111
266
Light-alloy wheels, care 254 Manual operation, rearview Neck restraints, front, see
Light control 113 camera 161 Head restraints 70
Light-emitting diodes, Manual operation, Side Neutral cleaner, see Wheel
LEDs 242 View 164 cleaner 254
Lighting 111 Manual operation, Top New wheels and tires 221
Light in the exterior mirror, View 166
see Active Blind Spot De‐ Marking, run-flat tires 222 O
tection 138 Matte finish 254
Light replacement 241 Maximum cooling 175 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 240
Lights and bulbs 241 Maximum speed, display 103 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
Light switch 111 Maximum speed, winter agnosis 240
List of all messages 31 tires 222 Obstacle marking, rearview
Load 200 Measurement, units of 30 camera 162
Loading 199 Medical kit 247 Octane rating, see Recom‐
Loading aid 186 Memory function 71 mended fuel grade 213
Loading, see Interior equip‐ Menu in instrument clus‐ Odometer 100
ment 186 ter 104 Office 6
Location, vehicle position 30 Menus 20 Oil 233
Locking, automatic 57 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Oil, adding 234
Locking, settings 56 Messages 31 Oil additives 235
Low beams 111 Messages, see Check Con‐ Oil change 236
Low beams, automatic, see trol 96 Oil change interval, service
High-beam Assistant 114 Microfilter 173, 177 requirements 102
Lower back support 66 Minimum tread, tires 220 Oil filler neck 234
Lumbar support 66 Mirror 72 Oil types, alternative 235
Mirror, see Memory func‐ Oil types, suitable 235
M tion 71 Old batteries, disposal 244
Mobile communication devi‐ Onboard Computer 105
Maintenance 239 ces in the vehicle 197 Onboard vehicle tool kit 241
Maintenance require‐ Mobility System 223 Opening and closing 46
ments 239 Modifications, technical, see Operating concept, iDrive 18
Maintenance, service require‐ For Your Own Safety 7 Operating via iDrive 20
ments 102 Moisture in headlight 242 Operating with the Control‐
Maintenance system, Monitor, see Control Dis‐ ler 20
BMW 239 play 18 Optional equipment 7
Make-up mirror 184 Mounting of child restraint Outside air, see Automatic re‐
Malfunction displays, see systems 76 circulated-air control 176
Check Control 96 Multifunctional instrument Overheating of engine, see
Manual air distribu‐ display 93 Coolant temperature 100
tion 173, 176 Multifunction steering wheel,
Manual air flow 173, 176 buttons 14 P
Manual operation, fuel filler Multimedia 6
flap 211 Paint, vehicle 253
Manual operation, PDC Park N Panic alarm, see Panic
Distance Control 158 mode 58
Navigation 6 Panic mode 58
267
Parallel parking assistant 167 Radio-operated remote con‐ Rolling code hand-held trans‐
Park Distance Control trol, opening/closing 46 mitter 181
PDC 157 Radio-ready state 79 Rollover protection sys‐
Parked-car ventilation 178 Rain sensor 85 tem 120
Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Rear lights 243 RON recommended fuel
tion 198 Rear socket 186 grade 213
Parking aid, see PDC 157 Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐ Roofliner 17
Parking assistant 167 ment 243 Roof, see Hardtop 60
Parking brake 83 Rearview camera 160 RSC Run Flat System Com‐
Parking lights 111 Rearview mirror 72 ponent, see Run-flat
Parts and accessories 8 Rear window de‐ tires 222
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐ froster 173, 177 Rubber components,
ing downward 72 Recirculated-air filter 177 care 254
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ Recirculated-air Run-flat tires 222
era 162 mode 173, 176
PDC Park Distance Con‐ Recommended fuel S
trol 157 grade 213
Personal profile, see driver Recommended tire Safe braking 197
profiles 54 brands 221 Safety belt reminder for driv‐
Person warning with City light Refueling 210 er's seat and front passen‐
braking function 135 Remaining range 101 ger seat 70
Pinch protection system, win‐ Remote control, additional 49 Safety belts 68
dows 60 Remote control, integrated Safety belts, care 255
Plastic, care 254 key 50 Safety belts, see Safety
Power failure 244 Remote control, loss 49 belts 68
Power windows 59 Remote control, malfunc‐ Safety systems, airbags 117
Prescribed engine oil tion 49 Saving fuel 201
types 235 Remote control, opening/ Screen, see Control Dis‐
Pressure, tire air pres‐ closing 46 play 18
sure 214 Remote control, univer‐ Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
Pressure warning FTM, sal 180 hicle tool kit 241
tires 126 Replacing parts 241 Sealant 223
Profiles, see driver profiles 54 Replacing wheels/tires 221 Seat heating, front 67
Programmable memory but‐ Reporting safety malfunc‐ Seating position for chil‐
tons, iDrive 24 tions 10 dren 75
Protective function, win‐ RES button 151 Seat, see Memory func‐
dows 60 RES button, see Active tion 71
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐ Cruise Control, ACC 148 Securing cargo 200
troller 19 RES button, see Cruise con‐ Selection list in instrument
trol 154 cluster 104
R Reserve warning, see Selector lever, see Steptronic
Range 101 transmission 88
Racetrack operation 198 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Sensors, care 255
Radiator fluid 237 TPM 122 Service and warranty 8
Radio 6 Retreaded tires 221
Roadside parking lights 111
268
Service requirements, Condi‐ Sport displays, torque dis‐ Symbols in the status field 24
tion Based Service play, performance dis‐
CBS 239 play 107 T
Service requirements, dis‐ SPORT program, driving dy‐
play 102 namics 145 Tachometer 100
Service, Roadside Assis‐ Sport steering, variable 144 Tailgate closing 53
tance 247 Stability control systems 142 Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
Services, ConnectedDrive 6 Standard equipment 7 ing 53
Servotronic 147 Start/stop, automatic func‐ Tailgate opening 53
SET button, see Active tion 81 Tailgate via remote con‐
Cruise Control, ACC 148 Start/Stop button 79 trol 48
SET button, see Cruise con‐ Starting the engine 80 Tail lamps 243
trol 154 Status control display, Technical changes, see For
Settings, locking/unlock‐ tires 122 Your Own Safety 7
ing 56 Status information, iDrive 24 Technical data 258
Settings on the Control Dis‐ Status of Owner's Manual 7 Telephone 6
play 29 Status, vehicle 109 Temperature, automatic cli‐
Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐ Steering assistance 147 mate control 172, 174
sion 88 Steering wheel, adjusting 74 Temperature display for ex‐
Shift paddles on the steering Steering wheel heating 74 ternal temperature 100
wheel 90 Steptronic Sport transmis‐ Temperature, engine oil 100
Shift point indicator 95 sion, see Steptronic trans‐ Terminal, starting aid 248
Side airbags 117 mission 88 Theft alarm system, see
Side View 163 Steptronic transmission 88 Alarm system 57
Signaling, horn 14 Stopping the engine 80 Thigh support 66
Signals when unlocking 57 Storage compartment in the Through-loading system 188
Sitting safely 65 rear 192 Tilt alarm sensor 58
Size 258 Storage compartments 190 Time 29
Smallest turning radius 258 Storage compartments, loca‐ Time of arrival 106
SMS text message, supple‐ tions 190 Tire damage 220
mentary 99 Storage, tires 222 Tire identification marks 218
Snow chains 226 Storing the vehicle 255 Tire inflation pressure 214
Socket 185 Stowing and securing Tire inflation pressure moni‐
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ cargo 200 tor, see FTM 126
nostics 240 Suitable devices 34 Tire Pressure Monitor
Software update 38 Suitable engine oil types 235 TPM 121
SOS button 246 Suitable mobile phones 34 Tire repair kit, see Mobility
Speed, average 106 Summer tires, tread 220 System 223
Speed Limit Info 103 Sun visor 184 Tires, changing 221
Speed Limit Info, Onboard Supplementary SMS text Tire sealant, see Mobility
Computer 106 message 99 System 223
Speed limits, display 103 Surround View 160 Tires, everything on wheels
Speed warning 107 Switch for driving dynam‐ and tires 214
Split screen 23 ics 144 Tires, run-flat tires 222
SPORT+ - program, driving Switch, see Cockpit 14 Tire tread 220
dynamics 145 Symbols 6 Tone 6
269
Tool 241 USB interface, position in ve‐ Washer fluid 87

Top View 164 hicle 186 Washer nozzles, wind‐
Total vehicle weight 259 USB port, see USB inter‐ shield 86
Touchpad 22 face 186 Washer system 84
Towing 249 Use, intended 7 Washing the vehicle 252
Tow-starting 249 Water on roads 197
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ V Weights 259
tor 121 Welcome lamps 112
Traction control 143 Vanity mirror 184 Welcome lights during un‐
TRACTION, driving dynam‐ Variable sport steering 144 locking 47
ics 143 Vehicle battery 243 Wheel base, vehicle 258
Transmission lock, electronic Vehicle battery, replac‐ Wheel cleaner 254
unlocking 91 ing 243 Wheels, changing 221
Transmission, Steptronic Vehicle, break-in 196 Wheels, everything on wheels
transmission 88 Vehicle care 253 and tires 214
Transporting children Vehicle care products 253 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
safely 75 Vehicle features and op‐ FTM 126
Tread, tires 220 tions 7 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
Trip computer 106 Vehicle identification num‐ tor TPM 121
Triple turn signal activa‐ ber 10 Width, vehicle 258
tion 84 Vehicle jack 228 WiFi connection 36
Trip odometer 100 Vehicle paint 253 Wind deflector 62
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐ Vehicle position, vehicle loca‐ Window defroster,
eter 100 tion 30 rear 173, 177
Trunk, cargo area partition 62 Vehicle status 109 Windows, powered 59
Trunk, emergency unlock‐ Vehicle storage 255 Windshield washer fluid 87
ing 53 Vehicle wash 252 Windshield washer noz‐
Turning circle 258 Vehicle, washing 252 zles 86
Turning radius lines, rearview Ventilation 177 Windshield washer sys‐
camera 162 Ventilation, see Parked-car tem 84
Turn signals, operation 83 ventilation 178 Windshield washer system,
VIN, see Vehicle identification see Washer/wiper sys‐
U number 10 tem 84
Voice activation system 26 Windshield wiper, see Wiper
Unintentional alarm 58 system 84
Units of measurement 30 W Winter storage, care 255
Universal remote control 180 Winter tires, suitable
Unlock button, see Steptronic Warning displays, see Check tires 221
transmission 88 Control 96 Winter tires, tread 220
Unlocking, automatic 57 Warning light in the exterior Wiper 84
Unlocking, settings 56 mirror, see Active Blind Spot Wiper blades, replacing 241
Updates made after the edito‐ Detection 138 Wiper fluid 87
rial deadline 7 Warning messages, see Wiper, fold-away position 86
Upholstery care 254 Check Control 96 Wiper system 84
USB connection 35 Warning triangle 247 Wood, care 254
Warranty 8
270
Word match concept, naviga‐

tion 22
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 241
X
xDrive 144
271
More about BMW
The Ultimate
bmwusa.com Driving Machine®
01402978162 ue
*BL2978162005*

BMW 4 Series Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW 4 Series Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW 4 Series Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Owner's Manual

A-Z The Ultimate

THE BMW 4 SERIES

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17

1. First action step.

Warranty BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐

standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. Vehicle identification

formation about motor vehicle safety from

For Canadian customers

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978162 - II/17

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows, all 59 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

3 Exterior mirror operation 72 Intelligent Safety 128

Front fog lights 114 Cruise control: resume speed

Light switch 111 Active Cruise Control: reduce

Lights off Active Cruise Control: increase

Parking lights 111 Cruise control rocker switch

Adaptive Light Control 113 Volume, see Owner's Manual for

6 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see Owner's Manual

11 Start/stop the engine and switch

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

13 Heated steering wheel 74 14 Adjust steering wheel 74

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Control Display 18 10 Parking brake 83

Side View 163

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request, SOS 246 3 Interior lights 115

2 Reading lights 115 4 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐

The concept 1 Control Display

Safety information General information

2. "Turn off control display"

Buttons on the Controller

Operation Open destination input menu for

Open navigation map.

Press and hold: open the menus

Open the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

▷ Move in four directions.

Press and hold: open the menus

Open the Options menu.

▷ Move in two directions.

The main menu is displayed.

Adapting the main menu

1. Press the button twice.

Open the Communication menu.

Open the Media/Radio menu.

Selecting menu items Opening recently used menus

Opening the Options menu

The "Options" menu is displayed.

2. Press the Controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual

▷ Press button. Changing settings

The arrow indicates that additional displays 3. Press the Controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions Entry comparison

Hold the controller down: delete all